B
HomeLibrariesCopilotSearchProjectsBookmarks
FeedbackHelp Desk
Libraries
Building Codes
Code LibraryIBC — BuildingIRC — ResidentialIFC — FireIPC — PlumbingIMC — MechanicalIFGC — Fuel GasIECC — EnergyNEC — ElectricalModel Codes
Specifications
CSI SpecificationsDOT SpecsTransit SpecsUSACE
Standards
TransportationRailroadFire SafetyAccessibilityStructural
Tools & References
DiagramsAssembliesProductsCalculatorsChecklistsPermits
PricingLog in
Structures

6-02Concrete Structures

WA · 2024 Standard SpecificationsBook pages 360490View official source ↗

Page 6-6 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02 Concrete Structures

6-02.1 Description

This Work consists of the construction of all Structures (and their parts) made of portland cement or blended hydraulic cement concrete with or without reinforcement, including bridge approach slabs. Any part of a Structure to be made of other materials shall be built as these Specifications require elsewhere.

6-02.2 Materials

Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections: Cement 9-01 Aggregates for Concrete 9-03.1 Gravel Backfill 9-03.12 Joint and Crack Sealing Materials 9-04 Threaded Anchor Rods, Nuts, and Resin Bonding Material 9-06.4 Strip Seal Expansion Joint Components 9-06.19(1) Modular Expansion Joint Components 9-06.19(2) Reinforcing Steel 9-07 Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel 9-07 Pigmented Sealer Materials 9-08.3(1) Exposed Aggregate Concrete Coatings and Sealers 9-08.3(2) Permeon Treatment 9-08.3(3) Grout 9-20.3 Mortar 9-20.4 Curing Materials and Admixtures 9-23 Fly Ash 9-23.9 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag 9-23.10 Microsilica Fume 9-23.11 Plastic Waterstop 9-24 Water 9-25 Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies 9-31

6-02.3 Construction Requirements

6-02.3(1) Classification of Structural Concrete

The class of concrete to be used shall be as noted in the Plans and these Specifications. The class includes the specified minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (numerical class) and may include a letter suffix to denote structural concrete for a specific use. Letter suffixes include A for bridge approach slabs, D for bridge decks, P for piling and shafts, and W for underwater. The numerical class without a letter suffix denotes structural concrete for general purposes. Concrete of a numerical class greater than 4000 shall conform to the requirements specified for either Class 4000 (if general-purpose) or for the appropriate Class 4000 with a letter suffix, as follows:

1.Mix design and proportioning specified in Sections 6-02.3(2) , 6-02.3(2)A and

6-02.3(2)A1 .

2.Consistency requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(4)C .
3.Temperature and time for placement requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(4)D .
4.Curing requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(11) . The Contractor may request, in writing, permission to use a different class of concrete with either the same or a higher compressive strength than specified. The substitute M 41-10 Page 6-7 Concrete Structures 6-02concrete shall be evaluated for acceptance based on the specified class of concrete. The Engineer will respond in writing. The Contractor shall bear all added costs that result from the change.

6-02.3(2) Proportioning Materials

The soluble chloride ion content shall be determined by the concrete supplier and included with the mix design. The soluble chloride ion content shall be determined by

1.testing mixed concrete cured at least 28 days or (2) totaled from tests of individual concrete ingredients (cement, aggregate, admixtures, water, fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, and other supplementary cementing materials). Chloride ion limits for admixtures and water are provided in Sections 9-23 and 9-25 . Soluble chloride ion limits for mixed concrete shall not exceed the following percent by mass of cement when tested in accordance with AASHTO T260: Category Acid-Soluble Water-Soluble Prestressed concrete 0.08 0.06 Reinforced concrete 0.10 0.08 Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use Type I or II portland cement or blended hydraulic cement in all concrete as defined in Section 9-01.2(1) . The use of fly ash is required for Class 4000P concrete, except that ground granulated blast furnace slag may be substituted for fly ash at a 1:1 ratio. The use of fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag is optional for all other classes of concrete and may be substituted for portland cement at a 1:1 ratio as noted in the table below. Cementitious Requirement for Concrete Class of ConcreteMinimum Cementitious Content (Pounds)Minimum percent Replacement of Fly Ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for Portland CementMaximum percent Replacement of Fly Ash for Portland CementMaximum percent Replacement of Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for Portland Cement 4000 564 * 35 50 4000A 564 * 25 30 4000P 600 15 35 50 4000W 564 * 35 50 3000 564 * 35 50 Commercial Concrete**564 * 35 50 *No minimum specified. **For Commercial Concrete, the minimum cementitious content is only required for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. When both ground granulated blast furnace slag and fly ash are included in the concrete mix, the total weight of both these materials is limited to 40 percent by weight of the total cementitious material for concrete class 4000A, and 50 percent by weight of the total cementitious material for all other classes of concrete. The water/cement ratio shall be calculated on the total weight of cementitious material. Cementitious materials are those listed in Section 5-05.2 . With the Engineer’s written concurrence, microsilica fume may be used in all classifications of Class 4000, Class 3000, and commercial concrete and is limited to a maximum of 10 percent of the cementitious material. Page 6-8 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresAs an alternative to the use of fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag and cement

as separate components, a blended hydraulic cement that meets the requirements of Section 9-01.2(1)B Blended Hydraulic Cements may be used.

6-02.3(2)A Contractor Mix Design

The Contractor shall provide a mix design in writing to the Engineer for all classes of concrete specified in the Plans except for lean concrete Type 2, commercial concrete and concrete class EA. No concrete shall be placed until the Engineer has reviewed the mix design. The required average 28-day compressive strength shall be selected in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 4, Section 4.2.3.3. ACI 211.1 shall be used to determine proportions. All proposed concrete mixes except Class 4000D shall meet the requirements in Cementitious Requirement for Concrete in Section 6-02.3(2) . The Contractor’s submittal of a mix design shall be on WSDOT Form 350-040 and shall provide a unique identification for each mix design. A unique identification for the mix design is comprised of the combination of the Mix Design Number and the Concrete Plant Number. The mix design shall include the mix proportions per cubic yard, the proposed sources, the average 28-day compressive strength for which the mix is designed, the fineness modulus, and the water cement ratio. The mix design submittal shall also include test results no older than one year showing that the Aggregates do not contain Deleterious Substances in accordance with Section 9-03 . Concrete placeability, workability, and strength shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of all mix design modifications. Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03.1(2) Class 1 or Class 2. Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03 . An alternate combined aggregate gradation conforming to Section 9-03.1(5) may also be used. The nominal maximum size aggregate for Class 4000P shall be ⅜ inch. The nominal maximum size aggregate for Class 4000A shall be 1 inch. Nominal maximum size for concrete aggregate is defined as the smallest standard sieve opening through which the entire amount of the aggregate is permitted to pass. A retarding admixture is required in concrete Class 4000P. Air content for concrete Class 4000D shall conform to Section 6-02.3(2)A1 . For all other concrete, air content shall be a minimum of 4.5 percent and a maximum of 7.5 percent for all concrete placed above the finished ground line unless noted otherwise.

6-02.3(2)A1 Contractor Mix Design for Concrete Class 4000D

All Class 4000D concrete shall conform to the following requirements:

1.Aggregate shall use combined gradation in accordance with Section 9-03.1(5) with a nominal maximum aggregate size of 1½ inches.
2.Permeability shall be less than 2,000 coulombs at 56 days in accordance with AASHTO T277.
3.Freeze-thaw durability shall be provided by one of the following methods:
a.The concrete shall maintain an air content between 4.5 and 7.5 percent.
b.The concrete shall maintain a minimum air content that achieves a durability factor of 90 percent, minimum, after 300 cycles in accordance with AASHTO T 161, Procedure A. This air content shall not be less than 3.0 percent. Test samples shall be obtained from concrete batches of a minimum of 3.0 cubic yards.
4.Shrinkage at 28 days shall be less than 0.032 percent in accordance with AASHTO T 160.
5.Density shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C138. M 41-10 Page 6-9 Concrete Structures 6-02The Contractor shall submit the mix design in accordance with Section 6-02.3(2)A . The submittal shall include test reports for all tests listed above that follow the reporting requirements of the AASHTO/ASTM procedures. Mix designs using shrinkage reducing admixture shall state the specific quantity required. Samples for testing may be obtained from either laboratory or concrete plant batches. If concrete plant batches are used, the minimum batch size shall be 3.0 cubic yards. Testing samples of mixes using shrinkage reducing admixture shall use the admixture and full water amounts specified in the mix design submittal. The Contractor shall submit the mix design and all test reports to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days prior to the placement of concrete in the bridge deck.

6-02.3(2)A2 Contractor Mix Design for Self-Consolidating Concrete

Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) is concrete that is able to flow under its own weight and completely fill the formwork without the need for vibration while maintaining homogeneity, even in the presence of dense reinforcement. SCC shall be capable of being pumped, and of flowing through the steel reinforcing bar cage without segregation or buildup of differential head inside or outside of the steel reinforcing bar cage. Type III cement may be used in SCC. SCC may be used for the following concrete Structure elements:

1.All cast-in-place concrete elements except bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, and cast-in-place concrete elements excluded by the Special Provisions.
2.Prestressed concrete girders in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(25) .
3.The following precast concrete elements:
a.Precast roof, wall, and floor panels and retaining wall panels in accordance with
b.Precast reinforced concrete three-sided structures, box culverts and split box culverts in accordance with Section 6-20 .
c.Precast concrete barrier in accordance with Section 6-10.3(1) .
d.Precast concrete wall stem panels in accordance with Section 6-11.3(3) .
e.Precast concrete noise wall panels in accordance with Section 6-12.3(6) .
f.Structural earth wall precast facing panels in accordance with Section 6-13.3(4) .
g.Precast drainage structure elements in accordance with Section 9-05.50 .
h.Precast junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes in accordance with Section 9-29.2 . The mix design submittal shall include items specified in Section 6-02.3(2)A and results of the following tests conducted on concrete that has slump flow within the slump flow range defined below:
1.Slump Flow.
a.The mix design shall specify the target slump flow in inches, in accordance with WSDOT FOP for ASTM C1611. The slump flow range is defined as the target slump flow plus or minus 2-inches.
b.The visual stability index (VSI) shall be less than or equal to 1, in accordance with ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using Filling Procedure B.
c.The T50 flow rate results shall be less than 6-seconds in accordance with ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using Filling Procedure B. Page 6-10 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures2. Column Segregation.

a.The maximum static segregation shall be 10-percent in accordance with ASTM C1610.
b.The Maximum Hardened Visual Stability Index (HVSI) shall be 1 in accordance with AASHTO PP 58.
3.J ring test results for passing ability shall be less than or equal to 1.5-inches in accordance with the WSDOT FOP for ASTM C1621.
4.Rapid assessment of static segregation resistance of self-consolidating concrete using penetration test in accordance with ASTM C1712 shall be less than or equal to 15 mm.
5.Air content shall be tested in accordance with WSDOT Test Method T 818 , and shall conform to Section 6-02.3(2)A .
6.Concrete unit weight results in pounds per cubic foot shall be recorded in accordance with AASHTO T 121, except that the concrete shall not be consolidated in the test mold.
7.The temperature of all concrete laboratory test samples shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 309 and shall conform to the placement limits specified in In lieu of a Contractor-Provided mix design for SCC for precast concrete barrier, precast drainage structures, and precast junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes, a representative full-size example Structure element shall be cast for inspection by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall have the structure sawn in half for examination by the Contracting Agency to determine that segregation has not occurred. The Contracting Agency’s acceptance of the sawn structure will constitute acceptance of the manufacturing facility’s use of SCC, and a concrete mix design submittal will not be required. Precast units cast at a manufacturing facility shall provide this sample as a component of the precast fabricating facility’s annual plant approval process. Precast units cast on site shall provide this sample prior to casting the additional units.

6-02.3(2)B Commercial Concrete

Commercial concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi in accordance with AASHTO T 22. Commercial concrete placed above the finished ground line shall be air entrained and have an air content from 4.5 percent to 7.5 percent in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 152. Commercial concrete does not require mix design or source approvals for cement, aggregate, and other admixtures. Where concrete Class 3000 is specified for items such as, culvert headwalls, plugging culverts, concrete pipe collars, pipe anchors, monument cases, Type PPB, PS, I, FB and RM signal standards, pedestals, cabinet bases, guardrail anchors, fence post footings, sidewalks, concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, and gutters, the Contractor may use commercial concrete. If commercial concrete is used for sidewalks, concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, and gutters, it shall have a minimum cementitious material content of 564 pounds per cubic yard of concrete, shall be air entrained, and the tolerances of Section

6-02.3(5)C shall apply.

M 41-10 Page 6-11 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(2)C Concrete Class EA Concrete for members and surfaces specified to receive an exposed aggregate finish shall be Class EA. Concrete Class EA shall conform to the following requirements: 28 day compressive strength 3,600 psi (minimum) Cement 610 pounds per cubic yard Fine Aggregate Class 1 880 pounds per cubic yard Coarse Aggregate Grading No. 67 2,160 pounds per cubic yard Water (maximum) 270 pounds per cubic yard Water/Cement Ratio (maximum) 0.44 A Type A water reducing admixture conforming to Section 9-23.6 shall be used in accordance with Section 6-02.3(3) . Air content shall conform to Section 6-02.3(2)A . Mixing water shall be the minimum required for satisfactory placement and shall not exceed the specified amount. Aggregate weights are based on a specific gravity of 2.67. Adjustments in the mix design will be made by the Engineer as necessary to correct for actual bulk specific gravity of the aggregates, moisture content of the aggregates, and to ensure proper consistency, workability, and correct cement content per cubic yard of concrete.

6-02.3(2)D Lean Concrete

Lean concrete Type 1 and lean concrete Type 2 are self-compacting, cementitious, flowable material requiring no subsequent vibration or tamping to achieve consolidation. Unless otherwise provided, when the specifications refer to “lean concrete” without being designated as Type 1 or Type 2, it shall be understood as meaning either lean concrete Type 1 or lean concrete Type 2, subject to their respective restrictions on use (found in other sections). Lean concrete Type 1 or Type 2 shall meet the following requirements: Requirements for Lean Concrete Lean Concrete Type 1 (See note 1) Lean Concrete Type 2 Min. 28 Day Strength 100 psi N/A Max. 28 Day Strength 300 psi N/A Max. water/cementitious content 2.0 2.0 Air Content Not specified Not specified Basis for AcceptanceCertification of Compliance

6-02.3(5)BCertification of Compliance

6-02 3(5)B

Is Vibration Required No No Is a mix design submittal required? Yes No Consistency RequirementPumpable and flowable (approximate slump 6 to 10 inches)Flowable (approximate slump 6 to 10 inches) Batching Requirements Meet 6-02.3(4) Meet 6-02.3(4) Minimum Cementitious Content (Pounds) No minimum specified 145 Maximum Cementitious Content (pounds) No maximum specified 200 Page 6-12 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresRequirements for Lean Concrete

Lean Concrete Type 1 (See note 1) Lean Concrete Type 2 Minimum percent Replacement of Fly Ash or Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for Portland Cement No minimum specified No minimum specified Maximum percent Replacement of Fly Ash for Portland Cement No maximum specified 30 Maximum percent Replacement of Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for Portland Cement No maximum specified 50 Note 1: The Contractor shall submit a mix design for lean concrete Type 1 on WSDOT Form 350- 040, as a Type 2 Working Drawing in accordance with Section 1-05.3, and shall provide a unique identification for the mix design. A unique identification for the mix design is composed of the combination of the Mix Design Number and the Concrete Plant Number. The mix design shall include the mix proportions per cubic yard, the proposed sources, the water cement ratio, and supporting strength test data. The mix design may be developed using, as a guideline, ACI 229R, Report on Controlled Low-Strength Materials, with the understanding that the requirements of Section 6- 02.3(2)D take precedence over conflicts with ACI 229R. Additionally, the mix design submittal shall include at least 15 consecutive sets of 28-day compressive strength tests (using ASTM D4832), which demonstrate that the mean and standard deviation provide not less than an 80% probability that tests will be between the minimum and maximum strengths specified. No lean concrete Type 1 shall be placed until the Engineer has reviewed and commented on the mix design.

6-02.3(3) Admixtures

Concrete admixtures shall be added to the concrete mix at the time of batching the concrete or in accordance with the manufacturer’s written procedure and as accepted by the Engineer. A copy of the manufacturer’s written procedure shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to use of admixtures. Deviations from the manufacturer’s written procedures shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. Admixtures shall not be added to the concrete with the modified procedures until the Engineer has concurred in writing. When the Contractor is proposing to use admixtures from different admixture manufacturers they shall provide evidence to the Engineer that the admixture will be compatible and not adversely affect the air void system of the hardened concrete. Test results complying with ASTM C457 shall be provided as the evidence to satisfy this requirement. Admixture combinations which have been previously tested and which are in compliance with ASTM C457 shall be listed in the Qualified Products List (QPL). Proposed combinations not found in the QPL shall meet this requirement. Accelerating admixtures conforming to Sections 9-23.6(4) or 9-23.6(6) and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations may be used in cast-in-place concrete, except as required here. Accelerating admixtures shall not be used in bridge decks, all concrete superstructures, crossbeams, columns, mass concrete, or new bridge approach slabs and expansion joints that are not part of a repair. Concrete placements with the least dimension greater than 6 feet shall be considered mass concrete. Concrete placement with the least dimension greater than 3 feet, but less than or equal than 6 feet, shall require the approval of the Engineer for the use of accelerating admixtures. Shafts shall not be considered mass concrete. Chloride based accelerating admixtures shall not be used. Air entrained cement shall not be used to air entrain concrete. M 41-10 Page 6-13 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(4) Ready-Mix Concrete All concrete, unless otherwise specified, shall be batched in a prequalified manual, semi- automatic, or automatic plant as described in Section 6-02.3(4)A . The Engineer is not responsible for delays due to problems in getting the plant certified.

6-02.3(4)A Qualification of Concrete Suppliers

Batch Plant Prequalification requires a certification by the National Ready Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA). Information concerning NRMCA certification may be obtained from the NRMCA at 900 Spring Street, Silver Springs, MD 20910 or online at www. nrmca.org . The NRMCA certification shall be valid for a 2-year period from the date of certificate. The following documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer; a copy of the current NRMCA Certificate of Conformance, the concrete mix design(s) (WSDOT Form 350-040 ), along with copies of the truck list, batch plant scale certification, admixture dispensing certification, and volumetric water batching devices (including water meters) verification. For central-mixed concrete, the mixer shall be equipped with a timer that prevents the batch from discharging until the batch has been mixed for the prescribed mixing time. A mixing time of 1 minute will be required after all materials and water have been introduced into the drum. Shorter mixing time may be allowed if the mixer performance is tested in accordance with (AASHTO M157 Annex A1 Concrete Uniformity Requirements). Tests shall be conducted by an independent testing lab or by a commercial concrete producer’s lab. If the tests are performed by a producer’s lab, the Engineer or a representative will witness all testing. For shrink-mixed concrete, the mixing time in the stationary mixer shall not be less than 30 seconds or until the ingredients have been thoroughly blended. For transit-mixed or shrink-mixed concrete, the mixing time in the transit mixer shall be a minimum of 70 revolutions at the mixing speed designated by the manufacturer of the mixer. Following mixing, the concrete in the transit mixer may be agitated at the manufacturer’s designated agitation speed. A maximum of 320 revolutions (total of mixing and agitation) will be permitted prior to discharge. All transit-mixers shall be equipped with an operational revolution counter and a functional device for measurement of water added. All mixing drums shall be free of concrete buildup and the mixing blades shall meet the minimum Specifications of the drum manufacturer. A copy of the manufacturer’s blade dimensions and configuration shall be on file at the concrete producer’s office. A clearly visible metal data plate (or plates) attached to each mixer and agitator shall display: (1) the maximum concrete capacity of the drum or container for mixing and agitating, and (2) the rotation speed of the drum or blades for both the agitation and mixing speeds. Mixers and agitators shall always operate within the capacity and speed-of-rotation limits set by the manufacturer. Mixers, when fully loaded, shall keep the concrete uniformly mixed. All mixers and agitators shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a steady rate. Only those transit- mixers which meet the above requirements will be allowed to deliver concrete to a Contracting Agency project covered by these Specifications. In transit-mixing, mixing shall begin within 30 seconds after the cement is added to the aggregates. Central-mixed concrete, transported by truck mixer/agitator, shall not undergo more than 250 revolutions of the drum or blades before beginning discharging. To remain below this limit, the suppler may agitate the concrete intermittently within the prescribed time limit. When water or admixtures are added after the load is initially mixed, an additional 30 revolutions will be required at the recommended mixing speed. For each project, at least biannually, or as required, the Plant Manager will examine mixers and agitators to check for buildup of hardened concrete or worn blades. If this Page 6-14 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresexamination reveals a problem, or if the Engineer wishes to test the quality of the

concrete, slump tests may be performed with samples taken at approximately the ¼ and ¾ points as the batch is discharged. The maximum allowable slump difference shall be as follows: If the average of the two slump tests is < 4 inches, the difference shall be < 1 inch or if the average of the two slump tests is >4 inches, the difference shall be < 1½ inches. If the slump difference exceeds these limits, the equipment shall not be used until the faulty condition is corrected. However, the equipment may continue in use if longer mixing times or smaller loads produce batches that pass the slump uniformity tests. All concrete production facilities will be subject to verification inspections at the discretion of the Engineer. Verification inspections are a check for: current scale certifications; accuracy of water metering devices; accuracy of the batching process; and verification of coarse aggregate quality. If the concrete producer fails to pass the verification inspection, the following actions will be taken:

1.For the first violation, a written warning will be provided.
2.For the second violation, the Engineer will give written notification and the Contracting Agency will assess a price reduction equal to 15 percent of the invoice cost of the concrete that is supplied from the time of the infraction until the deficient condition is corrected.
3.For the third violation, the concrete supplier is suspended from providing concrete until all such deficiencies causing the violation have been permanently corrected and the plant and equipment have been reinspected and meets all the prequalification requirements.
4.For the fourth violation, the concrete supplier shall be disqualified from supplying concrete for 1 year from the date of disqualification. At the end of the suspension period the concrete supplier may request that the facilities be inspected for prequalification.

6-02.3(4)B Jobsite Mixing

For small quantities of concrete, the Contractor may mix concrete on the job site provided the Contractor has requested in writing and received written permission from the Engineer. The Contractor’s written request shall include a mix design, batching and mixing procedures, and a list of the equipment performing the job-site mixing. All job site mixed concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. If the Engineer permits, hand mixing of concrete will be permitted for pipe collars, pipe plugs, fence posts, or other items receiving the concurrence of the Engineer, provided the hand mixing is done on a watertight platform in a way that distributes materials evenly throughout the mass. Mixing shall continue long enough to produce a uniform mixture. No hand mixed batch shall exceed ½ cubic yard. Concrete mixed at the jobsite is never permitted for placement in water.

6-02.3(4)C Consistency

The maximum slump for concrete shall be:

1.3½ inches for vibrated concrete placed in all bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, and flat slab bridge Superstructures.
2.4½ inches for all other vibrated concrete.
3.7 inches for non-vibrated concrete. (Includes Class 4000P) M 41-10 Page 6-15 Concrete Structures 6-024. 9 inches for shafts when using Class 4000P, provided the water cement ratio does not exceed 0.44 and a water reducer is used meeting the requirements of Section 9-23.6 .
5.5½ inches for all concrete placed in curbs, gutters, and sidewalks. When a high range water reducer is used, the maximum slump listed in 1, 2, 3, and 5 above, may be increased an additional 2 inches. For self-consolidating concrete (SCC), the slump requirements specified above do not apply, and are instead replaced by the target slump flow and slump flow range specified as part of the SCC mix design.

6-02.3(4)D Temperature and Time For Placement

Concrete temperatures shall remain between 55°F and 90°F while it is being placed, except that Class 4000D concrete temperatures shall remain between 55°F and 75°F during placement. The upper limit for placement for Class 4000D concrete may be increased to a maximum of 80°F if allowed by the Engineer. Precast concrete that is heat cured in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)D shall remain between 50°F and 90°F while being placed. The batch of concrete shall be discharged at the project site no more than 1½ hours after the cement is added to the concrete mixture. The time to discharge may be extended to 1¾ hours if the temperature of the concrete being placed is less than 75°F. With the concurrence of the Engineer and as long as the temperature of the concrete being placed is below 75°F, the maximum time to discharge may be extended to 2 hours. When conditions are such that the concrete may experience an accelerated initial set, the Engineer may require a shorter time to discharge. The time to discharge may be extended upon written request from the Contractor. This time extension will be considered on a case by case basis and requires the use of specific retardation admixtures and the concurrence of the Engineer.

6-02.3(5) Acceptance of Concrete

6-02.3(5)A General

Concrete for the following applications will be accepted based on a Certificate of Compliance to be provided by the supplier as described in Section 6-02.3(5)B :

1.Lean concrete.
2.Commercial concrete.
3.Class 4000P concrete for Roadside Steel Sign Support Foundations.
4.Class 4000P concrete for Type II, III, and CCTV Signal Standard Foundations that are 12’-0” or less in depth.
5.Class 4000P concrete for Type IV and V Strain Pole Foundations that are 12’-0” or less in depth.
6.Class 4000P concrete for Steel Light Standard Foundations Types A & B. Concrete Class EA will be accepted based on conformance to the requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(2)C for proportioning, temperature, and 28 day compressive strength. Slip-form barrier concrete will be accepted based on conformance to the requirements for temperature, air content and compressive strength at 28 days for sublots as tested and determined by the Contracting Agency. All other concrete not listed herein will be accepted based on conformance to the requirement for temperature, slump, air content for concrete placed above finished ground line, and the specified compressive strength at 28 days for sublots as tested and determined by the Contracting Agency. Page 6-16 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresA sublot is defined as the material represented by an individual strength test. An individual

strength test is the average compressive strength of cylinders from the same sample of material. Each sublot will be deemed to have met the specified compressive strength requirement when both of the following conditions are met:

1.Individual strength tests do not fall below the specified strength by more than 12½ percent or 500 psi, whichever is least.
2.An individual strength test averaged with the two preceding individual strength tests meets or exceeds specified strength (for the same class and exact mix I.D. of concrete on the same Contract). When compressive strengths fail to satisfy one or both of the above requirements, the Contractor may:
1.Request acceptance based on the Contractor/Suppliers strength test data for cylinders made from the same truckload of concrete as the Contracting Agency cylinders; provided:
a.The Contractor’s test results are obtained from testing cylinders fabricated, handled, and stored for 28 days in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22. The test cylinders shall be the same size cylinders as those cast by the Contracting Agency.
b.The technician fabricating the cylinders is qualified by either ACI, Grade 1 or WAQTC to perform this Work.
c.The Laboratory performing the tests in accordance with AASHTO T 22 has an equipment calibration/certification system, and a technician training and evaluation process in accordance with AASHTO R-18.
d.Both the Contractor and Contracting Agency have at least 15 test results from the same mix to compare. The Contractor’s results could be used if the Contractor’s computed average of all their test results is within one standard deviation of the Contracting Agency’s average test result. The computed standard deviation of the Contractor’s results must also be within plus or minus 200 psi of the Contracting Agency’s standard deviation.
2.Request acceptance of in-place concrete strength based on core results. This method will not be used if the Engineer determines coring would be harmful to the integrity of the Structure. Cores, if allowed, will be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with AASHTO T 24 and delivered to the Contracting Agency for testing in accordance with AASHTO T 22. If the concrete in the Structure will be dry under service conditions, the core will be air dried at a temperature of between 60°F and 80°F and at a relative humidity of less than 60 percent for 7 days before testing, and will be tested air dry. Acceptance for each sublot by the core method requires that the average compressive strength of three cores be at least 85 percent of the specified strength with no one core less than 75 percent of the specified strength. When the Contractor requests strength analysis by coring, the results obtained will be accepted by both parties as conclusive and supersede all other strength data for the concrete sublot. If the Contractor elects to core, cores shall be obtained no later than 50 days after initial concrete placement. The Engineer will concur in the locations to be cored. Repair of cored areas shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost incurred in coring and testing these cores, including repair of core locations, shall be borne by the Contractor. M 41-10 Page 6-17 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(5)B Certification of Compliance The concrete producer shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each truckload of concrete. The Certificate of Compliance shall verify that the delivered concrete is in compliance with the mix design and shall include: Manufacturer plant (batching facility) Contracting Agency Contract number Date Time batched Truck No. Initial revolution counter reading Quantity (quantity batched this load) Type of concrete by class and producer design mix number Cement producer, type, and Mill Certification No. (The mill test number as required by Section 9-01.3 is the basis for acceptance of cement.) Fly ash (if used) brand and Class Accepted aggregate gradation designation Mix design weight per cubic yard and actual batched weights for: Cement Fly ash (if used) Coarse concrete aggregate and moisture content (each size) Fine concrete aggregate and moisture content Water (including free moisture in aggregates) Admixtures brand and total quantity batched Air-entraining admixture Water-reducing admixture Other admixture For concretes that use combined aggregate gradation, the Certificate of Compliance shall include the aggregate components and moisture contents for each size in lieu of the aggregate information described above. For commercial concrete, the Certificate of Compliance shall include, as a minimum, the batching facility, date, and quantity batched per load.

6-02.3(5)C Conformance to Mix Design

Cement, coarse and fine aggregate weights shall be within the following tolerances of the mix design: Batch Volumes less than or equal to 4 cubic yards Batch Volumes more than 4 cubic yards Cement +5% -1% Cement +5% -1% Aggregate +10% -2% Aggregate +2% -2% If the total cementitious material weight is made up of different components, these component weights shall be within the following tolerances:

1.Cement weight plus 5 percent or minus 1 percent of that specified in the mix design.
2.Fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag weight plus or minus 5 percent of that specified in the mix design.
3.Microsilica weight plus or minus 10 percent of that specified in the mix design. Water shall not exceed the maximum water specified in the mix design. Page 6-18 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(5)D Test Methods

Acceptance testing will be performed by the Contracting Agency in accordance with the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01. The test methods to be used with this Specification are: AASHTO T 22 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens FOP for AASHTO R 100 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field FOP for AASHTO T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete FOP for WAQTC TM 2 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete FOP for AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method FOP for AASHTO T 231 Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens FOP for AASHTO T 309 Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C1611 Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of Self-Consolidating Concrete (Inverted Mold Method only) ASTM C1621 Standard Test Method for Passing Ability of Self-Consolidating Concrete by J-Ring (Inverted Mold Method only)

6-02.3(5)E Point of Acceptance

Determination of concrete properties for acceptance will be made based on samples taken as follows: Bridge decks, overlays, bridge approach slabs, and barriers at the discharge of the placement system. All other placements at the truck discharge. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide adequate and representative samples of the fresh concrete to a location designated by the Engineer for the testing of concrete properties and making of cylinder specimens. Samples shall be provided as directed in Sections 1-06.1 and 1-06.2 . Once the Contractor has turned over the concrete for acceptance testing, no more mix adjustment will be allowed. The concrete will either be accepted or rejected.

6-02.3(5)F Water/Cement Ratio Conformance

The actual water cement ratio shall be determined from the certified proportions of the mix, adjusting for on the job additions. No water may be added after acceptance testing or after placement has begun, except for concrete used in slip forming. For slip-formed concrete, water may be added during placement but shall not exceed the maximum water cement ratio in the mix design, and shall meet the requirements for consistency as described in Section 6-02.3(4)C . If water is added, an air and temperature test shall be taken prior to resuming placement to ensure that Specification conformance has been maintained.

6-02.3(5)G Sampling and Testing for Temperature, Consistency, and Air Content

Concrete properties shall be determined from concrete as delivered to the project and as accepted by the Contractor for placement. The Contracting Agency will perform acceptance testing on all concrete for temperature and air content, if applicable. Concrete that is not self-consolidating concrete will be tested for slump. The following additional acceptance tests will be performed on self-consolidating concrete: M 41-10 Page 6-19 Concrete Structures 6-021. Slump flow within the target slump flow range.

2.J ring passing ability less than or equal to 1.5 inches.
3.VSI less than or equal to 1. Sampling and testing will be performed before concrete placement from the first load. Concrete shall not be placed until all tests have been completed by the Engineer, and the results indicate that the concrete is within acceptable limits. If the concrete is not within acceptable limits, sampling and testing will continue before concrete placement for each load until one load meets all of the applicable acceptance requirements. After one test indicates that the concrete is within specified limits, the concrete may be placed and the sampling and testing frequency may decrease to one for every 100 cubic yards. Sampling shall be performed in accordance with FOP for WAQTC TM 2 and random samples shall be selected in accordance with WSDOT T 716 . After the first acceptable load of concrete, up to ½ cubic yard may be placed from subsequent loads to be tested prior to testing for acceptance. When the results for all subsequent acceptance tests indicate that the concrete as delivered and approved by the Contractor for placement does not conform to the specified limits, the sampling and testing frequency will be resumed for each load. Whenever one subsequent test indicates that the concrete is within the specified limits, the random sampling and testing frequency of one for every 100 cubic yards may resume. Sampling and testing for a placement of one class of concrete consisting of 50 cubic yards or less will be as listed above, except that after one set of tests indicate that the concrete is within specified limits, the remaining concrete to be placed may be accepted by visual inspection.

6-02.3(5)H Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength and Initial Curing

Acceptance testing for compressive strength shall be conducted at the same frequency as the acceptance tests for temperature, consistency, and air content. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient number of cure boxes in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 for curing concrete cylinders. The cure boxes shall be readily accessible and no more than 500 feet from the point of acceptance testing, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also provide, maintain and operate all necessary power sources and connections needed to operate the cure boxes. The cure boxes shall be in-place and functioning at the specified temperature for curing cylinders prior to concrete placement. Concrete cylinders shall be cured in the cure boxes in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100. The cure boxes shall have working locks and the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with one key to each of the locks. Once concrete cylinders are placed in the cure box, the cure box shall not be disturbed until the cylinders have been removed. The Contractor shall retain the cure box Temperature Measuring Device log and provide it to the Engineer upon request. The Contractor shall protect concrete cylinders in cure boxes from excessive vibration and shock waves during the curing period in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)D . All cure box costs shall be incidental to the associated item of work.

6-02.3(5)I Test Section for Cast-In-Place SCC

Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct a test section of the element being constructed of cast-in-place SCC. The Contractor shall confirm, through the SCC placement operation in the test section, the SCC flows the distance required, completely filling the forms and encapsulating the reinforcement as required without leaving voids and pockets and causing segregation of the SCC mix. The test section forms, reinforcing steel and concrete placing operations shall be identical to those to be used in the production elements. Page 6-20 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresFor horizontal elements, the test section shall simulate the flow of concrete for the

maximum distance anticipated during production concrete placement. The depth and width of the test section for horizontal element may be smaller than the actual depth and width of the element to be cast. For vertical elements, the test section shall be a minimum of 33-percent of the height of the tallest element to be constructed. The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of formwork and reinforcement details of the test section and SCC placement procedures. After removing the forms, the test section will be inspected for signs of honeycombs, cracks, aggregate segregation, sedimentation, cold joints, and other surface and concrete placement defects. If such defects are present, the Contractor shall revise the formwork and SCC placement procedures as necessary to eliminate such defects. Acceptance of the test section and the SCC mix design is contingent on acceptable visual inspection, and a minimum of two 4-inch minimum diameter core samples taken from the placement location and the furthest-most limits of the concrete as identified by the Engineer. The number of core locations will be specified by the Engineer. The difference in average unit weight of the locations represented by the core samples shall be less than 5-percent. The Contractor shall use the same SCC placement procedures confirmed by the Engineer accepted test section for casting the production members.

6-02.3(5)J SCC in Precast Units

SCC for concrete barrier will be accepted in accordance with temperature, air, and compressive strength testing listed in Section 6-02.3(9) . SCC for precast junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes will be accepted in accordance with the temperature and compressive strength testing listed in Section 6-02.3(9) . SCC for precast drainage structure elements will be accepted in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M199.

6-02.3(5)K Rejecting Concrete

Rejection Without Testing – The Engineer, prior to sampling, may reject any batch or load of concrete that appears defective in composition; such as cement content or aggregate proportions. Rejected material shall not be incorporated in the Structure.

6-02.3(5)L Concrete With Non-Conforming Strength

Concrete with cylinder compressive strengths (fc) that fail to meet acceptance level requirements shall be evaluated for structural adequacy. If the material is found to be adequate, payment shall be adjusted in accordance with the following formula: Pay adjustment = 2(f’c – fc)(UP)(Q) f’cWhere: f’c = Specified minimum compressive strength at 28 days. fc = Compressive strength at 28 days as determined by AASHTO Test Methods. UP = Unit Contract price per cubic yard for the class of concrete involved. Q = Quantity of concrete represented by an acceptance test based on the required frequency of testing. M 41-10 Page 6-21 Concrete Structures 6-02Concrete that fails to meet minimum acceptance levels using the coring method will be evaluated for structural adequacy. If the material is found to be adequate, payment shall be adjusted in accordance with the following formula: Pay adjustment = 3.56(.85f’c – f cores)(UP)(Q) f’cWhere: f’c = Specified minimum compressive strength at 28 days. f cores = Compressive strength of the cores as determined by AASHTO T 22. UP = Unit Contract price per cubic yard for the class of concrete involved. Q = Quantity of concrete represented by an acceptance test based on the required frequency of testing. Where these Specifications designate payment for the concrete on other than a per cubic yard basis, the unit Contract price of concrete shall be taken as $300 per cubic yard for concrete Class 4000, 5000, and 6000. For concrete Class 3000, the unit contract price for Concrete shall be $160 per cubic yard.

6-02.3(6) Placing Concrete

The Contractor shall not place concrete:

1.On frozen or ice-coated ground or Subgrade;
2.Against or on ice-coated forms, reinforcing steel, structural steel, conduits, precast members, or construction joints;
3.Under rainy conditions; placing of concrete shall be stopped before the quantity of surface water is sufficient to affect or damage surface mortar quality or cause a flow or wash the concrete surface;
4.In a foundation until the Engineer has accepted its depth and characteristics;
5.Until the Engineer has accepted the form and the placement of installed reinforcing; or
6.In a Work area when vibrations from nearby Work may harm the concrete’s initial set or strength. When a foundation excavation contains water, the Contractor shall pump it dry before placing concrete. If this is impossible, an underwater concrete seal shall be placed that complies with Section 6-02.3(6)B . This seal shall be thick enough to resist uplift. All foundations, forms, and contacting concrete surfaces shall be moistened with water just before the concrete is placed. Standing water on the foundation, concrete surface, or forms shall be removed. The Contractor shall place concrete in the forms as soon as possible after mixing. The concrete shall always be plastic and workable. For this reason, the Engineer may reduce the time to discharge even further. Concrete placement shall be continuous, with no interruption longer than 30 minutes between adjoining layers unless the Engineer allows a longer time. The Type 2 Working Drawing submittal shall include justification that the concrete mix design will remain fluid for interruptions longer than 30 minutes between placements. Each layer shall be placed and consolidated before the preceding layer takes initial set. After initial set, the forms shall not be jarred, and projecting ends of reinforcing bars shall not be disturbed. In girders or walls, concrete shall be placed in continuous, horizontal layers 1½ to 2½ feet deep. Compaction shall leave no line of separation between layers. In each part of a form, the concrete shall be deposited as near its final position as possible. Methods for placing and consolidating concrete shall not segregate aggregates or displace reinforcing steel. Methods shall leave a compact, dense, and impervious concrete with smooth faces on exposed surfaces. Plastering is not permitted. Defective concrete shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense. Page 6-22 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresTo prevent aggregates from separating, the conveyor belt used to transport concrete shall

not exceed 300 feet in length. If the mix needs protection from sun or rain, the Contractor shall cover the belt. When concrete pumps are used for placement, a Contractor’s representative shall, prior to use on the first placement of each day, visually inspect the pumps water chamber for water leakage. No pump shall be used that allows free water to flow past the piston. If a concrete pump is used as the placing system, the pump priming slurry shall be discarded before placement. Initial acceptance testing may be delayed until the pump priming slurry has been eliminated from the concrete being pumped. Eliminating the priming slurry from the concrete may require that several cubic yards of concrete are discharged through the pumping system and discarded. Use of a concrete pump requires a reserve pump (or other backup equipment) at the site. If the concrete will drop more than 5 feet, it shall be deposited through a sheet metal (or other accepted) conduit. If the form slopes, the concrete shall be lowered through accepted conduit to keep it from sliding down one side of the form. No aluminum conduits or tremies shall be used to pump or place concrete. If aluminum concrete truck end chutes are used, concrete shall be continuously discharged in a manner that minimizes contact time between the concrete and the chute. Before placing bridge deck concrete on steel spans, the Contractor shall release the falsework under the bridge and let the span swing free on its supports. Concrete in flat slab bridges shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span or series of continuous spans. Concrete for bridge decks and the stems of T-beams or box-girders shall be placed in separate operations if the stem of the beam or girder is more than 3 feet deep. First the beam or girder stem shall be filled to the bottom of the slab fillets. Bridge deck concrete shall not be placed until enough time has passed to permit the earlier concrete to shrink (at least 12 hours). If stem depth is 3 feet or less, the Contractor may place concrete in 1 continuous operation if the Engineer concurs. Between expansion or construction joints, concrete in beams, girders, bridge decks, piers, columns, walls, and traffic and pedestrian barriers shall be placed in a continuous operation. After the concrete has been consolidated and prior to the application of cure, all surfaces of concrete that are not placed against forms shall be struck off to the planned elevation or slope and the surface shall be finished by floating with a float to seal the surface. No traffic or pedestrian barrier shall be placed until after the bridge deck is complete for the entire Structure. No concrete barriers shall be placed until the falsework has been released and the span supports itself. The Contractor may choose not to release the deck overhang falsework prior to the barrier placement. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of calculations indicating the loads induced into the girder webs due to the barrier weight and all live loads placed on the Structure do not exceed the design capacity of the girder component. This analysis is not required for bridges with concrete Superstructures. No barrier, curb, or sidewalk shall be placed on steel or prestressed concrete girder bridges until the bridge deck reaches a compressive strength of at least 3,000 psi. The Contractor may construct traffic and pedestrian barriers by the slipform method. However, the barrier may not deviate more than ¼ inch when measured by a 10-foot straightedge held longitudinally on the front face, back face, and top surface. Electrical conduit within the barrier shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Section 8-20.3(5) . When placing concrete in arch rings, the Contractor shall ensure that the load on the falsework remains symmetrical and uniform. M 41-10 Page 6-23 Concrete Structures 6-02Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, arch ribs in open spandrel arches shall be placed in sections. Small key sections between large sections shall be filled after the large sections have shrunk.

6-02.3(6)A Weather and Temperature Limits to Protect Concrete

6-02.3(6)A1 Hot Weather Protection

The Contractor shall provide concrete within the specified temperature limits. Cooling of the coarse aggregate piles by sprinkling with water is permitted provided the moisture content is monitored, the mixing water is adjusted for the free water in the aggregate and the coarse aggregate is removed from at least 1 foot above the bottom of the pile. Sprinkling of fine aggregate piles with water is not allowed. Refrigerating mixing water, or replacing all or part of the mixing water with crushed ice is permitted, provided the ice is completely melted by placing time. If air temperature exceeds 90°F, the Contractor shall use water spray or other accepted methods to cool all concrete-contact surfaces to less than 90°F. These surfaces include forms, reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges, and any others that touch the concrete.

6-02.3(6)A2 Cold Weather Protection

Concrete shall be maintained at or above a temperature of 40°F during the first seven days of the Cold Weather Protection Period and at or above a temperature of 35°F during the remainder of the Cold Weather Protection Period. Cold weather protection requirements do not apply to concrete in shafts and piles placed below the ground line. Prior to placing concrete in cold weather, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing with a written procedure for cold weather concreting. The procedure shall detail how the Contractor will adequately cure the concrete and prevent the concrete temperature from falling below the minimum temperature. Extra protection shall be provided for areas especially vulnerable to freezing (such as exposed top surfaces, corners and edges, thin sections, and concrete placed into steel forms). Concrete placement will only be allowed if the Contractor’s cold weather protection plan has been accepted by the Engineer. Prior to concrete placement, the Contractor shall review the 7-day temperature predictions for the job site from the Western Region Headquarters of the National Weather Service ( www.wrh.noaa.gov ). When temperatures below 35°F are predicted, the Contractor shall:

1.Install temperature sensors in each concrete placement. One sensor shall be installed for every 100 cubic yards of concrete placed. Sensors shall be installed at locations directed by the Engineer, and shall be placed 1.5 inches from the face of concrete.
2.Immediately after concrete placement, temperature sensors shall be installed on the concrete surface at locations directed by the Engineer. One sensor shall be installed for every 100 cubic yards of concrete placed. Temperatures shall be measured and recorded a minimum of every hour for the duration of the Cold Weather Protection Period. Temperature data shall be submitted to the Engineer as a Type 1 Working Drawing within three days following the end of the Cold Weather Protection Period. For each day that the concrete temperature falls below 40°F during the first seven days of the Cold Weather Protection Period, no curing time is awarded for that day and the Cold Weather Protection Period is extended for one additional day. If the concrete temperature falls below 35°F during the Cold Weather Protection Period, the concrete may be rejected by the Engineer. Page 6-24 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(6)B Placing Concrete in Foundation Seals

If the Plans require a concrete seal, the Contractor shall place the concrete underwater inside a watertight cofferdam, tube, or caisson. Seal concrete shall be placed in a compact mass in still water. It shall remain undisturbed and in still water until fully set. While seal concrete is being deposited, the water elevation inside and outside the cofferdam shall remain equal to prevent any flow through the seal in either direction. The cofferdam shall be vented at the vent elevation shown in the Plans. The thickness of the seal is based upon this vent elevation. The seal shall be at least 18 inches thick unless the Plans show otherwise. The Engineer may change the seal thickness during construction which may require redesign of the footing and the pier shaft or column. Although seal thickness changes may result in the use of more or less concrete, reinforcing steel, and excavation, payment will remain as originally defined in unit Contract prices. To place seal concrete underwater, the Contractor shall use a concrete pump or tremie. The tremie shall have a hopper at the top that empties into a watertight tube at least 10 inches in diameter. The discharge end of the tube on the tremie or concrete pump shall include a device to seal out water while the tube is first filled with concrete. Tube supports shall permit the discharge end to move freely across the entire Work area and to drop rapidly to slow or stop the flow. One tremie may be used to concrete an area up to 18 feet per side. Each additional area of this size requires one additional tremie. Throughout the underwater concrete placement operation, the discharge end of the tube shall remain submerged in the concrete and the tube shall always contain enough concrete to prevent water from entering. The concrete placement shall be continuous until the Work is completed, resulting in a seamless, uniform seal. If the concreting operation is interrupted, the Engineer may require the Contractor to prove by core drilling or other tests that the seal contains no voids or horizontal joints. If testing reveals voids or joints, the Contractor shall repair them or replace the seal at no expense to the Contracting Agency. Concrete Class 4000W shall be used for seals, and it shall meet the consistency requirements of Section 6-02.3(4)C .

6-02.3(6)C Dewatering Concrete Seals and Foundations

After a concrete seal is constructed, the Contractor shall pump the water out of the cofferdam and place the rest of the concrete in the dry. This pumping shall not begin until the seal has set enough to withstand the hydrostatic pressure (3 days for gravity seals and 10 days for seals containing piling or shafts). The Engineer may extend these waiting periods to ensure structural safety or to meet a condition of the operating permit. If weighted cribs are used to resist hydrostatic pressure at the bottom of the seal, the Contractor shall anchor them to the foundation seal. Any method used (such as dowels or keys) shall transfer the entire weight of the crib to the seal. No pumping shall be done during or for 24 hours after concrete placement unless done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete Work by a watertight wall. Pumping shall be done in a way that rules out any chance of concrete being carried away.

6-02.3(6)D Protection Against Vibration

Freshly placed concrete shall not be subjected to excessive vibration and shock waves during the curing period until it has reached a 2,000 psi minimum compressive strength for structural concrete and lower-strength classes of concrete. After the first 5 hours from the time the concrete has been placed and consolidated, the Contractor shall keep all vibration producing operations at a safe horizontal distance from the freshly placed concrete by following either the prescriptive safe distance method or the monitoring safe distance method. These requirements for the protection of freshly M 41-10 Page 6-25 Concrete Structures 6-02placed concrete against vibration shall not apply for plant cast concrete, nor shall they apply to the vibrations caused by the traveling public.

6-02.3(6)D1 Prescriptive Safe Distance Method

After the concrete has been placed and consolidated, the Contractor shall keep all vibration producing operations at a safe horizontal distance from the freshly placed concrete as follows: Minimum Compressive Strength, f’cSafe Horizontal Distance1 Equipment Class L2 Equipment Class H3 < 1,000 psi 75 feet 125 feet 1,000 to < 1,400 psi 30 feet 50 feet 1,400 to 2,000 psi 15 feet 25 feet 1The safe horizontal distance shall be reduced to 10 feet for small rubber tire construction equipment like backhoes under 50,000 pounds, concrete placing equipment, and legal Highway vehicles if such equipment travels at speeds of: • ≤ 5 mph on relatively smooth Roadway surfaces or • ≤ 3 mph on rough Roadway surfaces (i.e., with potholes) 2Equipment Class L (Low Vibration) shall include tracked dozers under 85,000 pounds, track vehicles, trucks (unless excluded above), hand-operated jack hammers, cranes, auger drill rig, caisson drilling, vibratory roller compactors under 30,000 pounds, and grab-hammers. 3Equipment Class H (High Vibration) shall include pile drivers, vibratory hammers, machine-operated impact tools, pavement breakers, and other large pieces of equipment. After the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength specified above, the safe horizontal distance restrictions would no longer apply.

6-02.3(6)D2 Monitoring Safe Distance Method

The Contractor may monitor the vibration producing operations in order to decrease the safe horizontal distance requirements of the prescriptive safe distance method. If this method is chosen, all construction operations that produce vibration or shock waves in the vicinity of freshly placed concrete shall be monitored by the Contractor with monitoring equipment sensitive enough to detect a minimum peak particle velocity (PPV) of 0.10 inches per second. Monitoring devices shall be placed on or adjacent to the freshly placed concrete when the measurements are taken. During the time subsequent to the concrete placement, the Contractor shall cease all vibration or shock producing operations in the vicinity of the newly placed concrete when the monitoring equipment detects excessive vibration and shock waves defined as exceeding the following PPVs: Minimum Compressive Strength, f’c Maximum PPV < 1,000 psi 0.10 in/sec 1,000 to < 1,400 psi 1.0 in/sec 1,400 to 2,000 psi 2.0 in/sec After the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength specified above, the safe horizontal distance restrictions would no longer apply.

6-02.3(7) Tolerances

Unless noted otherwise, concrete construction tolerances shall be in accordance with this section. Tolerances in this section do not apply to cement concrete pavement. Horizontal deviation of roadway crown points, cross-slope break points, and curb, barrier or railing edges from alignment or work line: ±1.0 inch Deviation from plane: ±0.5 inch in 10 feet Page 6-26 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresDeviation from plane for roadway surfaces: ±0.25 inch in 10 feet

Deviation from plumb or specified batter: ±0.5 inch in 10 feet, but not to exceed a total of ±1.5 inches Plumbness or vertical deviation of webs for precast concrete girders and beams at points of support after erection: ± 1/8 inch in 1 foot Vertical deviation from profile grade for roadway surfaces: ±1 inch Vertical deviation of top surfaces (except roadway surfaces): ±0.75 inch Thickness of bridge decks and other structural slabs not at grade: ±0.25 inch Length, width and thickness of elements such as columns, beams, crossbeams, diaphragms, corbels, piers, abutments and walls, including dimensions to construction joints in initial placements: +0.5 inch, -0.25 inch Length, width and thickness of spread footing foundations: +2 inches, -0.5 inch Horizontal location of the as-placed edge of spread footing foundations: The greater of ±2% of the horizontal dimension of the foundation perpendicular to the edge and ±0.5 inch. However, the tolerance shall not exceed ±2 inches. Location of opening, insert or embedded item at concrete surface: ±0.5 inch Cross-sectional dimensions of opening: ±0.5 inch Bridge deck, bridge approach slab, and bridge traffic barrier expansion joint gaps with a specified temperature range, measured at a stable temperature: ±0.25 inch Horizontal deviation of centerline of bearing pad, oak block or other bearing assembly: ±0.125 inch Horizontal deviation of centerline of supported element from centerline of bearing pad, oak block or other bearing assembly ±0.25 inch Vertical deviation of top of bearing pad, oak block or other bearing assembly: ±0.125 inch

6-02.3(8) Vibration of Concrete

The Contractor shall supply enough vibrators to consolidate the concrete (except that placed underwater) according to the requirements of this section. Each vibrator shall:

1.Be designed to operate while submerged in the concrete,
2.Vibrate at a rate of at least 7,000 pulses per minute, and
3.Receive the Engineer’s acceptance on its type and method of use. Immediately after concrete is placed, vibration shall be applied in the fresh batch at the point of deposit. In doing so, the Contractor shall:
1.Space the vibrators evenly, no farther apart than twice the radius of the visible effects of the vibration;
2.Ensure that vibration intensity is great enough to visibly affect a weight of 1-inch slump concrete across a radius of at least 18 inches;
3.Insert the vibrators slowly to a depth that will effectively vibrate the full depth of each layer, penetrating into the previous layer on multilayer pours;
4.Protect partially hardened concrete (i.e., nonplastic, which prevents vibrator penetration when only its own weight is applied) by preventing the vibrator from penetrating it or making direct contact with steel that extends into it;
5.Not allow vibration to continue in one place long enough to form pools of grout;
6.Continue vibration long enough to consolidate the concrete thoroughly, but not so long as to segregate it; M 41-10 Page 6-27 Concrete Structures 6-027. Withdraw the vibrators slowly when the process is complete; and
8.Not use vibrators to move concrete from one point to another in the forms. When vibrating and finishing top surfaces that will be exposed to weather or wear, the Contractor shall not draw water or laitance to the surface. In high lifts, the top layer shall be shallow and made up of a concrete mix as stiff as can be effectively vibrated and finished. To produce a smooth, dense finish on outside surfaces, the Contractor shall hand tamp the concrete. Vibration of SCC shall only be used as described below or as approved by the Engineer:
1.To prevent the formation of a cold joint in between placement of successive batches of SCC.
2.Near the end of an SCC placement to aid in leveling the SCC in the forms. When vibration of SCC is allowed, the magnitude and duration of the applied vibration shall be kept as minimal as possible.

6-02.3(9) Precast Concrete Units

Precast concrete units may be cast at a manufacturing facility or cast on-site within the project limits unless otherwise stated in these Specifications. Pretensioned prestressed precast concrete units are prohibited from being cast on-site. The manufacturing facility shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute’s Plant Certification Program for the type of precast member to be produced, or the National Precast Concrete Association’s Plant Certification Program or be an International Congress Building Officials or International Code Council Evaluation Services recognized fabricator of structural precast concrete products, and shall be approved by WSDOT as a Certified Precast Concrete Fabricator prior to the start of production. WSDOT Certification will be granted at, and renewed during, the annual precast plant review and approval process in accordance with WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01 Standard Practice QC 7. Products that require annual plant approval include noise barrier panels, wall panels, floor and roof panels, marine pier deck panels, retaining walls, pier caps, and bridge deck panels. Precast concrete panels that are prestressed shall meet all the requirements of Section 6-02.3(25) . Precast units that are cast within the project limits shall be considered cast on-site and are exempt from the fabrication plant approval requirement for precast products. Cast on-site units shall meet all the same quality control standards as a manufacturing facility, and all the requirements in these Specifications. Additionally, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of an On-site Pre-casting and Quality Control Plan for review prior to beginning any on-site precast work. This may be a Type 2 Working Drawing if item 6 does not apply. The On-site Pre-casting and Quality Control Plan shall include at a minimum the following items:

1.List of unit(s) to be cast on-site
2.Name of designated Quality Control Supervisor for all on-site casting operations
3.Location for on-site casting, curing, and storage
4.On-site casting quality control plan and procedures
5.Concrete mix design
6.Calculation of required compressive strength if unit is to be removed from the form prior to the concrete strength reaching 70% of the specified design strength, as specified in Section 6-02.3(9)B . Page 6-28 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe Contractor shall be responsible for quality control inspection on all precast concrete

units. Prior to the start of production of the precast concrete units, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the production schedule. The Contractor shall give the Inspector safe and free access to the Work. If the Inspector observes non-specification Work or unacceptable quality control practices, the Inspector will advise the plant manager if cast at a manufacturing facility or the Contactor’s Quality Control Supervisor if cast on-site. If the corrective action is not acceptable to the Engineer, the units will be subject to rejection. Type III portland cement or blended hydraulic cement is permitted to be used in precast concrete units. Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) may be used in accordance with Section 6-02.3(2)A . Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Contractor and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer when cast at a manufacturing facility. When cast on site, acceptance testing shall be performed by WSDOT. Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(2)A and Section 6-02.3(5) , unless otherwise noted. The test methods described in Section 6-02.3(5)D shall be followed, unless otherwise noted. Compressive strength testing shall be performed a minimum of once per day and once for every 20 cubic yards of concrete that is placed.

6-02.3(9)A Shop Drawings

Before casting the structural elements, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings of the precast unit shop drawings. These shop drawings shall show complete details of the methods, materials, and equipment the Contractor proposes to use in prestressing/precasting Work. The shop drawings shall follow the design conditions shown in the Plans and accepted On-site Pre-casting Quality Control Plan, if applicable, unless the Engineer concurs with equally effective variations. The shop drawings shall contain as a minimum:

1.Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions.
2.Finishes and method of constructing the finish (i.e., forming, rolling).
3.Reinforcing, joint, and connection details.
4.Location and type of lifting, bracing, and erection inserts including manufacturer’s recommended safe working capacity.
5.Material specifications
6.Locations and details of hardware attached to the Structure.
7.Relationship to adjacent material. Deviations from the approved shop drawings shall only be permitted after submitting a Type 2 Working Drawing that describes the proposed changes. Before completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with shop drawings (which include all processed changes). These shall be clear and in a format that conforms with Section 6-01.9 .

6-02.3(9)B Casting

Before casting precast concrete units, the Contractor and Fabrication Inspector or Engineer shall have possession of a processed set of shop drawings. Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 6-02.3(25)C for annual preapproval of the concrete mix design and slump. Concrete for cast on-site units shall be in accordance with the accepted On-site Pre-casting and Quality Control Plan. Precast units shall not be removed from forms until the concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 70 percent of the specified design strength. A minimum compressive strength less than 70 M 41-10 Page 6-29 Concrete Structures 6-02percent may be used for specific precast units if calculations are submitted and accepted in a Type 2E Working Drawing computed in accordance with the PCI Design Handbook indicating the required compressive strength for product handling. The calculations shall include, at a minimum, the effects of stripping, rigging configuration, stripping method, form suction, impact factors, effects of bunking, and the recommended safety factor for the modulus of rupture. Curing requirements of Section 6-02.3(9)C shall be maintained until 70% of the specified design strength is achieved. Forms may be steel or plywood faced, providing they impart the required finish to the concrete.

6-02.3(9)C Curing

Concrete in the precast units shall be cured by either moist or accelerated curing methods. The curing methods to be used by a manufacturing facility shall be preapproved in the WSDOT plant certification process. The methods to be used when cast on-site shall be as accepted in the On-site Pre-casting and Quality Control Plan.

1.For moist curing, the surface of the concrete shall be kept covered or moist until such time as the compressive strength of the concrete reaches 70% of the specified design strength. Exposed surfaces shall be kept continually moist by fogging, spraying, or covering with moist burlap or cotton mats. Moist curing shall commence as soon as possible following completion of surface finishing.
2.For accelerated curing, heat shall be applied at a controlled rate following the initial set of concrete in combination with an effective method of supplying or retaining moisture. Moisture may be applied by a cover of moist burlap, cotton matting, or other effective means. Moisture may be retained by covering the unit with an impermeable sheet. Heat may be radiant, convection, conducted steam or hot air. Heat the concrete to no more than 100°F during the first 2 hours after placing the concrete, and then increase no more than 25°F per hour to a maximum of 175°F. After curing is complete, cool the concrete no more than 25°F per hour to 100°F. Maintain the concrete temperature above 60°F until the unit reaches stripping strength. Concrete temperature shall be monitored by means of a thermocouple embedded in the concrete (linked with a thermometer accurate to plus or minus 5°F). The recording sensor (accurate to plus or minus 5°F) shall be arranged and calibrated to continuously record, date, and identify concrete temperature throughout the heating cycle. This temperature record shall be made available to the Engineer for inspection and become a part of the documentation required. The Contractor shall never allow dry heat to directly touch exposed unit surfaces at any point.

6-02.3(9)D Control Strength

The concrete strength at stripping and the verification of design strength shall be determined by testing cylinders made from the same concrete as the precast units. The cylinders shall be made, handled, and stored in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO R 100 and compression tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22 and AASHTO T 231. For accelerated cured units, concrete strength shall be measured on test cylinders cast from the same concrete as that in the unit. These cylinders shall be cured under time- temperature relationships and conditions that simulate those of the unit. If the forms are heated by steam or hot air, test cylinders will remain in the coolest zone throughout curing. If forms are heated another way, the Contractor shall provide a record of the curing time- temperature relationship for the cylinders for each unit to the Engineer. When two or more units are cast in a continuous line and in a continuous operation, a Page 6-30 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuressingle set of test cylinders may represent all units provided the Contractor demonstrates

uniformity of casting and curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall mold, cure, and test enough of these cylinders to satisfy Specification requirements for measuring concrete strength. The Contractor may use 4- by 8-inch or 6- by 12-inch cylinders. The Contractor shall let cylinders cool for at least ½ hour before testing for release strength. Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 after the unit concrete has obtained the required release strength. If, however, the Contractor intends to ship or transport the unit, when cast on-site, prior to standard 28-day strength test, the design strength for shipping shall be determined from cylinders placed with the unit and cured under the same conditions as the unit. These cylinders may be placed in a non-insulated, moisture-proof envelope. To measure concrete strength in the precast unit, the Contractor shall randomly select two test cylinders and average their compressive strengths. The compressive strength in each cylinder shall not fall more than 5 percent below the specified strength. If these two cylinders do not pass the test, two other cylinders shall be selected and tested.

6-02.3(9)E Finishing

The Contractor shall provide a finish on all relevant concrete surfaces as defined in Section 6-02.3(14) , unless the Plans or Special Provisions require otherwise.

6-02.3(9)F Tolerances

The precast units shall be fabricated as shown in the Plans, and shall meet the dimensional tolerances listed in the latest edition of PCI-MNL-116, unless otherwise required by the Specifications, Plans or Special Provisions.

6-02.3(9)G Handling and Storage

The Contractor shall lift all units only by adequate devices at locations designated on the shop drawings. The precast units shall not be stored or handled in a manner such that the stresses imposed on the structure, as presented in the On-site Pre-casting and Quality management Plan, are exceeded or cause damage to the structure including cracking and spalling. The Contactor shall submit lifting calculations as a supplement to the On-Site Pre-Casting Quality Control Plan at the request of the Engineer. Precast units shall be stored off the ground on foundations suitable to prevent differential settlement or twisting of the unit. Stacked units shall be separated and supported by dunnage of uniform thickness capable of supporting the unit. Dunnage shall be arranged in vertical planes. The upper units of a stacked tier shall not be used as storage areas for shorter units unless submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing containing engineering analysis and accepted by the Engineer. Precast units with hairline cracks visibly apparent, radiating from the lifting loops or support locations extending more than three inches along the structure, or with hairline cracks in other locations, will be subject to evaluation by the Engineer for possible rejection. Precast units whose lifting loops pull out will be subject to evaluation by the Engineer for possible rejection.

6-02.3(9)H Shipping

Precast units shall not be shipped or transported if cast on-site until the concrete has reached the specified design strength, and the Engineer has reviewed the fabrication documentation for Contract compliance. Units cast at a manufacturing facility shall be stamped “Approved for Shipment”. Units cast on site shall not be transported to their permanent location until approved by the Engineer. The units shall be supported in such a manner that they will not be damaged by anticipated impact on their dead load. Sufficient M 41-10 Page 6-31 Concrete Structures 6-02padding material shall be provided between tie chains and cables to prevent chipping or spalling of the concrete.

6-02.3(9)I Erection

Precast units shall not be erected until the concrete has reached the specified design strength, and the Engineer has reviewed the fabrication documentation for Contract compliance. When the precast units arrive on the project from the manufacturing facility, the Engineer will confirm that they are stamped “Approved for Shipment”. The Engineer will evaluate the present units for damage before accepting them. Units cast on-site shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to erection. The Contractor shall lift all precast units by suitable devices at locations designated on the shop drawings. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided, if necessary. Precast units shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the Plans. Variations between adjacent elements shall be leveled out by a method accepted by the Engineer.

6-02.3(10) Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs

6-02.3(10)A Pre-Deck Pour Meeting

A pre-deck pour meeting shall be held 5 to 10 working days before placing deck concrete to discuss construction procedures, personnel, equipment to be used, concrete sampling and testing and deck finishing and curing operations. Those attending shall include, at a minimum, the superintendent, foremen in charge of placing and finishing concrete, and representatives from the concrete supplier and the concrete pump truck supplier. If the project includes more than one bridge deck, and if the Contractor’s key personnel change between concreting operations, or at request of the Engineer, additional conferences shall be held before each deck placement.

6-02.3(10)B Screed Rail Supports

The Contractor shall place screed rails outside the finishing area. When screed rails cannot be placed outside the finishing area as determined by the Engineer, they shall rest on adjustable supports that can be removed with the least possible disturbance to the screeded concrete. The supports shall rest on structural members or on forms rigid enough to resist deflection. Supports shall be removable to at least 2 inches below the finished surface. For staged constructed bridge decks, the finishing machine screed rails shall not be supported on the completed portion of deck and shall deflect with the portion of structure under construction. Screed rails (with their supports) shall be strong enough and stiff enough to permit the finishing machine to operate effectively on them. All screed rails shall be placed and secured for the full length of the deck/slab before the concreting begins. If the Engineer concurs in advance, the Contractor may move rails ahead onto previously set supports while concreting progresses. However, such movable rails and their supports shall not change the set elevation of the screed. On steel truss and girder spans, screed rails and bulkheads may be placed directly on transverse steel floorbeams, with the strike-board moving at right angles to the centerline of the Roadway.

6-02.3(10)C Finishing Equipment

The finishing machine shall be self-propelled and be capable of forward and reverse movement under positive control. The finishing machine shall be equipped with augers and a rotating cylindrical single or double drum screed. The finishing machine shall have the necessary adjustments to produce the required cross section, line, and grade. The finishing machine shall be capable of raising the screeds, augers, and any other parts of the finishing mechanical operation to clear the screeded surface and returning to the specified grade under positive control. Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, a Page 6-32 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresfinishing machine manufacturer technical representative shall be on site to assist the first

use of the machine on the Contract. For bridge deck widening of 20 feet or less, and for bridge approach slabs, or where jobsite conditions do not allow the use of the conventional configuration finishing machines, or modified conventional machines as described above, the Contractor may submit a Type 2 Working Drawing proposing the use of a hand-operated motorized power screed such as a “Texas” or “Bunyan” screed. This screed shall be capable of finishing the bridge deck and bridge approach slab to the same standards as the finishing machine. On bridge decks, the Contractor may use hand-operated strike-boards only when the Engineer concurs for special conditions where self-propelled or motorized hand-operated screeds cannot be employed. These boards shall be sturdy and able to strike off the full placement width without intermediate supports. Strike-boards, screed rails, and all other specially made auxiliary equipment shall receive the Engineer’s concurrence before use. All finishing requirements in these Specifications apply to hand-operated finishing equipment.

6-02.3(10)D Concrete Placement, Finishing, and Texturing

6-02.3(10)D1 Test Slab Using Bridge Deck Concrete

After the Contractor receives the Engineer’s acceptance of the Class 4000D concrete mix design, and a minimum of seven calendar days prior to the first placement of bridge deck concrete, the Contractor shall construct a test slab using concrete of the accepted mix design. The test slab may be constructed on grade, shall have a minimum thickness of 8-inches, shall have minimum plan dimensions of 10-feet along all four edges, and shall be square or rectangular. During construction of the test slab, the Contractor shall demonstrate concrete sampling and testing, use of the concrete temperature monitoring system, the concrete fogging system, concrete placement system, and the concrete finishing operation. The Contractor shall conduct the demonstration using the same type of equipment to be used for the production bridge decks, except that the Contractor may elect to finish the test slab with a hand-operated strike-board. After the construction of the test slab and the demonstration of bridge deck construction operations is complete, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the test slab in accordance with Sections 2-02.3 and 2-03.3(7)C .

6-02.3(10)D2 Preparation for Concrete Placement

Before placing bridge approach slab concrete, the subgrade shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 2-06 and 5-05.3(6) . Before concrete is placed, the finishing machine shall be operated over the entire length of the deck/slab to check screed deflection. Concrete placement may begin only if the Engineer accepts after this test. Immediately before placing concrete, the Contractor shall check (and adjust if necessary) all falsework and wedges to minimize settlement and deflection from the added mass of the concrete deck/slab. The Contractor shall also install devices, such as telltales, by which the Engineer can readily measure settlement and deflection.

6-02.3(10)D3 Concrete Placement

The placement operation shall cover the full width of the bridge deck or the full width between construction joints. The Contractor shall locate all construction joints over a beam or web that can support the deck/slab on each side of the joint. The joint shall not occur over a pier unless the Plans permit. Each joint shall be formed vertically and in true alignment. The Contractor shall not release falsework or wedges supporting M 41-10 Page 6-33 Concrete Structures 6-02bridge deck placement sections on either side of a joint until each side has aged as these Specifications require. Placement of concrete for bridge decks and bridge approach slabs shall comply with

1.Place it (without segregation) against concrete placed earlier, as near as possible to its final position, approximately to grade, and in shallow, closely spaced piles;
2.Consolidate it around reinforcing steel by using vibrators before strike-off by the finishing machine;
3.Not use vibrators to move concrete;
4.Not revibrate the concrete surface areas where workers have stopped prior to screeding;
5.Remove concrete, if any, splashed onto reinforcing steel in adjacent segments before concreting them;
6.Maintain a slight excess of concrete in front of the screed across the entire width of the placement operation. The Contractor shall coordinate the rate of placement such that the concrete is placed, consolidated, and struck off within 30 minutes from the time of placement, unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer at the pre-deck pour meeting;
7.Operate the finishing machine to create a surface that is true and ready for final finish without overfinishing or bringing excessive amounts of mortar to the surface; and
8.Leave a thin, even film of mortar on the concrete surface after the last pass of the finishing machine pan. Workers shall complete all post screeding operations without walking on the concrete. This may require work bridges spanning the full width of the deck/slab. After removing the screed supports, the Contractor shall fill the voids with concrete (not mortar). If the surface left by the finishing machine is porous, rough, or has minor irregularities, the Contractor shall float the surface of the concrete. Floating shall leave a smooth and even surface. Float finishing shall be kept to the minimum number of passes necessary to seal the surface. The floats shall be at least 4-feet long. Each transverse pass of the float shall overlap the previous pass by at least half the length of the float. The first floating shall be at right angles to the strike-off. The second floating shall be at right angles to the centerline of the span. A smooth riding surface shall be maintained across construction joints. The edge of completed roadway slabs at expansion joints and compression seals shall have a ⅜-inch radius. After floating, but while the concrete remains plastic, the Contractor shall test the entire deck/slab for flatness (allowing for crown, camber, and vertical curvature). The testing shall be done with a 10-foot straightedge held on the surface. The straightedge shall be advanced in successive positions parallel to the centerline, moving not more than one half the length of the straightedge each time it advances. This procedure shall be repeated with the straightedge held perpendicular to the centerline. An acceptable surface shall be one free from deviations of more than ⅛-inch under the 10-foot straightedge. If the test reveals depressions, the Contractor shall fill them with freshly mixed concrete, strike off, consolidate, and refinish them. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Retesting and refinishing shall continue until a surface conforming to the requirements specified above is produced. Page 6-34 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(10)D4 Vacant

6-02.3(10)D5 Bridge Deck Concrete Finishing and Texturing

Except as otherwise specified for portions of bridge decks receiving an overlay or sidewalk under the same Contract, the Contractor shall texture the surface of the bridge deck as follows: The Contractor shall texture the bridge deck using diamond tipped saw blades mounted on a power driven, self-propelled machine that is designed to texture concrete surfaces. The grooving equipment shall provide grooves that are ⅛" ± 1/64" wide, 3/16" ± 1/16" deep, and spaced at ¾" ± ⅛". The bridge deck shall not be textured with a metal tined comb. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the type of grooving equipment to be used. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the method and equipment for texturing the bridge deck will not chip, spall or otherwise damage the deck. Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall texture the concrete bridge deck surface either in a longitudinal direction, parallel with centerline or in a transverse direction, perpendicular with centerline. The Contractor shall texture the bridge deck surface to within 3-inches minimum and 24-inches maximum of the edge of concrete at expansion joints, within 1-foot minimum and 2-feet maximum of the curb line, and within 3-inches minimum and 9-inches maximum of the perimeter of bridge drain assemblies. The Contractor shall contain and collect all concrete dust and debris generated by the bridge deck texturing process, and shall dispose of the collected concrete dust and debris in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C . If the Plans call for placement of a sidewalk or an HMA or concrete overlay on the bridge deck, the Contractor shall produce the final finish of these areas by dragging a strip of damp, seamless burlap lengthwise over the bridge deck or by brooming it lightly. Approximately 3-feet of the drag shall contact the surface, with the least possible bow in its leading edge. It shall be kept wet and free of hardened lumps of concrete. When the burlap drag fails to produce the required finish, the Contractor shall replace it. When not in use, it shall be lifted clear of the bridge deck. After the bridge deck has cured, the surface shall conform to the surface smoothness requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(10)D3 . Areas identified as not meeting the requirements of Section 6-02.3(10)D3 shall be repaired with a procedure acceptable to the Engineer. All repairs shall be completed prior to surface texturing. Methods used to remove high spots shall cut through the mortar and aggregate without breaking or dislodging the aggregate or causing spalls.

6-02.3(10)D6 Bridge Approach Slab Finishing and Texturing

Bridge approach slabs that are being built as part of a bridge construction project shall be textured in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D5 . All other bridge approach slabs shall be textured using metal tined combs in the transverse direction, except bridge approach slabs receiving an overlay in the same Contract shall be finished as specified in The comb shall be made of a single row of metal tines. It shall leave striations in the fresh concrete approximately 3/16-inch deep by ⅛-inch wide and spaced approximately ½-inch apart. The Engineer will decide actual depths at the site. If the comb has not been accepted, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s acceptance by demonstrating it on a test section. The Contractor may operate the combs manually or mechanically, either M 41-10 Page 6-35 Concrete Structures 6-02singly or with several placed end to end. The timing and method used shall produce the required texture without displacing larger particles of aggregate. Texturing shall end 2-feet from curb lines. This 2-foot untextured strip shall be hand finished with a steel trowel. Surface smoothness, high spots, and low spots shall be addressed as specified in Section

6-02.3(10)D5 The surface texture on an area cut down or built up shall match closely

that of the surrounding bridge approach slab area. The entire bridge approach slab shall provide a smooth riding surface.

6-02.3(10)E Sidewalk

Concrete for sidewalk shall be well compacted, struck off with a strike-board, and floated with a wooden float to achieve a surface that does not vary more than ⅛ inch under a 10- foot straightedge. An edging tool shall be used to finish all sidewalk edges and expansion joints. The final surface shall have a granular texture that will not turn slick when wet.

6-02.3(10)F Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors

Bridge approach slabs shall be constructed full bridge deck width from outside usable Shoulder to outside usable Shoulder at an elevation to match the Structure. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, the pavement end of the bridge approach slab shall be constructed normal to the Roadway centerline. The bridge approach slabs shall be modified as shown in the Plans to accommodate the grate inlets at the bridge ends if the grate inlets are required. Bridge approach slab anchors shall be installed as detailed in the Plans, and the anchor rods, couplers, and nuts shall conform to Section 9-06.5(1) . The steel plates shall conform to ASTM A36. All metal parts of the approach expansion anchor shall receive one coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F or be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. The pipe shall be non-perforated PE or PVC pipe of the diameter specified in the Plans. Polystyrene shall conform to Section 9-04.6 . The anchors shall be installed parallel both to profile grade and centerline of Roadway. The Contractor shall secure the anchors to ensure that they will not be misaligned during concrete placement. For Method B anchor installations, the epoxy bonding agent used to install the anchors shall be Type IV conforming to Section 9-26.1 . The compression seal shall be as noted in the Contract documents. Dowel bars shall be installed in the bridge approach slabs in accordance with the requirements of the Standard Plans and Section 5-05.3(10) . The compression seal shall be a 2½ inch wide gland and shall conform to Section 9-04.1(4) .

6-02.3(11) Curing Concrete

After placement, concrete surfaces shall be cured as follows:

1.Bridge sidewalks, roofs of cut and cover tunnels – Two coats of curing compound covered by white, reflective type sheeting or continuous wet curing. Curing by either method shall be for at least 10 days.
2.Bridge decks — See Section 6-02.3(11)B .
3.Bridge approach slabs – Two coats of curing compound and continuous wet cure for at least 10 days.
4.Concrete barriers and rail bases – See Section 6-02.3(11)A .
5.All other concrete surfaces – Continuous wet curing for at least 3 days. When continuous wet curing is specified, the Contractor shall keep all exposed concrete surfaces saturated with water. Formed concrete surfaces shall be kept in a continuous wet cure by leaving the forms in place. If forms are removed during the continuous wet curing period, the Contractor shall treat the concrete as an exposed concrete surface. Runoff Page 6-36 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structureswater shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with all applicable regulations. In

no case shall runoff water be allowed to enter lakes, streams, or other surface waters. When curing compound is specified, it shall conform to Section 9-23.2 . The Contractor shall use white pigmented curing compound (Type 2), unless stated otherwise. If the surface will be covered with HMA, the curing compound shall be white (Type 2, Class B). For bridge sidewalks, the curing compound shall be clear (Type 1, Class B). The compound shall be applied immediately after finishing and shall be agitated thoroughly just before and during application. Application of the second coat shall run at right angles to that of the first, and the coverage shall total at least 1 gallon per 150 square feet. If any curing compound spills on construction joints or reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall remove it before the next concrete placement. If other materials are to be bonded to the surface (e.g., HMA, pigmented sealer), the Contractor shall remove the curing compound by sandblasting or acceptable high-pressure water washing after the curing is completed. The Contractor shall have on the site, back-up spray equipment, enough workers, and (if needed) a work bridge from which they will apply the curing compound. The Engineer may require the Contractor to demonstrate (at least 1 day before the scheduled concrete placement) that the crew and equipment can apply the compound acceptably. When white, reflective type sheeting is specified, it shall conform to Section 9-23.1 . The sheeting shall be kept in place by taping or weighting the edges where they overlap. When curing bridge approach slabs, two coats of curing compound shall be applied within 15 minutes after floating and tining any portion of the bridge approach slabs. The continuous wet curing shall be established as soon as the concrete has set enough to allow covering without damaging the finish. When accelerating admixtures are used, the concrete shall be cured in accordance with these Specifications or until the concrete has reached 70 percent of the mix design 28-day strength, but not less than 3 days.

6-02.3(11)A Curing and Finishing Concrete Barriers and Rail Bases

6-02.3(11)A1 Fixed-Form Barrier

The fixed-form wet curing period shall be at least 10 days. The edge chamfers shall be formed by attaching chamfer strips to the barrier forms. After troweling and edging a barrier (while the forms remain in place), the Contractor shall:

1.Brush the top surface with a fine bristle brush;
2.Cover the top surface with heavy, quilted blankets (not burlap); and
3.Spray water on the blankets and forms at intervals sufficient to keep them continuously wet for 3 days minimum. Alternatively, if forms are removed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)N , heavy, quilted blankets (not burlap) shall be placed to completely cover the barrier immediately after form removal and kept continuously wet. After performing the above steps, the Contractor shall:
4.Remove all lips and edgings with sharp tools or chisels;
5.Fill all holes with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) ;
6.True up corners of openings;
7.Remove concrete projecting beyond the true surface by stoning or grinding;
8.Completely cover the barrier with heavy, quilted blankets (not burlap);
9.Keep the blankets continuously wet for the remainder of the curing period. M 41-10 Page 6-37 Concrete Structures 6-02The Contractor may start the finishing Work described in steps 4 through 7 above after the third day of curing if the entire barrier is kept covered except the immediate Work area. Otherwise, no finishing Work may be done until the wet curing period has been completed. After a minimum of 7 days of the wet curing period, the Contractor shall clean the barrier by removing all form-release agent, mud, dust, other foreign substances, blisters, and air voids just below the surface, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This shall be accomplished in either of two ways: (1) by light sandblasting and washing with water, or
2.by spraying with a high-pressure water jet. The water jet equipment shall use clean fresh water and shall produce (at the nozzle) at least 1,500 psi with a discharge of at least 3 gpm. The water jet nozzle shall have a 25-degree tip and shall be held no more than 9 inches from the surface being washed. After cleaning, the Contractor shall use brushes to rub mortar conforming to Section

9-20.4(2) at a ratio of 1:1 cement/aggregate ratio into air holes and small crevices on all

surfaces except the brushed top. As soon as the mortar takes its initial set, the Contractor shall rub it off with a piece of sacking or carpet. The barrier shall then be completely covered with wet blankets for the greater of 48 hours or the remainder of the wet curing period. If the above steps of cleaning and filling with mortar are performed during the 10-day wet curing period, the wet curing blankets shall only be removed in the immediate Work area while the Work is being performed and for no longer than 8 hours. No curing compound shall be used on fixed-form concrete barrier. The completed surface of the concrete shall be even in color and texture.

6-02.3(11)A2 Slip-Form Barrier

The edge radius shall be formed by attaching radius strips to the barrier slip form. The Contractor shall finish slip-form barrier by: (1) steel troweling to close all surface pockmarks and holes; and (2) for plain surface barrier, lightly brushing the front and back face with vertical strokes and the top surface with transverse strokes. After finishing, the Contractor shall cure the slip-form barrier by using either Method A (curing compound) or B (wet blankets) described below. Method A – Under the curing compound method, the Contractor shall:

1.Spray two coats of clear curing compound (Type 1) on the concrete surface after the free water has disappeared.
2.No later than the morning after applying the curing compound, cover the barrier with white, reflective sheeting for at least 10 days.
3.After the 10-day curing period, remove the curing compound as necessary by light sandblasting or by spraying with a high-pressure water jet to produce an even surface appearance. The water jet equipment shall use clean fresh water and shall produce (at the nozzle) at least 2,500 psi with a discharge of at least 4 gpm. The water jet nozzle shall have a 25-degree tip and shall be held no more than 9 inches from the surface being cleaned. The Contractor may propose to use a curing compound/concrete sealer. The Engineer will evaluate the proposal and if found acceptable, will accept the proposal in writing. As a minimum, the Contractor’s proposal shall include: • Product identity • Manufacturer’s recommended application rate • Method of application and necessary equipment • Safety Data Sheet (SDS) • Sample of the material for testing Allow 14 working days for evaluating the proposal and testing the material. Page 6-38 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresMethod B – Under the wet curing method, the Contractor shall:

1.Provide an initial curing period by continuous fogging or mist spraying for at least the first 24 hours.
2.After the initial curing period, cover the barrier with a heavy, quilted blanket.
3.Keep the blankets continuously wet for at least 10 days. No additional finishing is required at the end of the curing period.

6-02.3(11)B Curing Bridge Deck

6-02.3(11)B1 Equipment & Submittals

The fogging apparatus shall consist of pressure washers with a minimum nozzle output of 1,500 psi, or other means accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the bridge deck curing plan a minimum of 14 calendar days prior to the pre-deck pour meeting. The Contractor’s plan shall describe the sequence and timing that will be used to fog the bridge deck, apply pre-soaked burlap, install soaker hoses and cover the deck with white , reflective sheeting.

6-02.3(11)B2 Curing

The fogging apparatus shall be in place and charged for fogging prior to beginning concrete placement for the bridge deck. The Contractor shall presoak all burlap to be used to cover the deck during curing. Immediately after the finishing machine passes over finished concrete, the Contractor shall implement the following tasks:

1.The Contractor shall fog the bridge deck as necessary to suppress evaporation and maintain a wet sheen without developing pooling or sheeting water.
2.The Contractor shall apply the presoaked burlap to the top surface to fully cover the deck within 1 hour after the finishing machine has passed, unless otherwise accepted in the cold weather protection Working Drawing or as accepted by the Engineer during deck casting. The burlap shall be placed flat from work bridges to minimize unnecessary damage to the concrete finish. The Contractor shall not apply curing compound.
3.The Contractor shall continue to keep the burlap wet by fogging as needed until the burlap is covered by soaker hoses and white, reflective sheeting. The Contractor shall place the soaker hoses and white, reflective sheeting after the concrete has achieved initial set. The Contractor shall charge the soaker hoses frequently so as to keep the burlap covering the entire deck wet during the course of curing. As an alternative to tasks 2 and 3 above, the Contractor may propose a curing system using proprietary curing blankets specifically manufactured for bridge deck curing. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of details of the proprietary curing blanket system, including product literature and details of how the system is to be installed and maintained. The wet curing regime as described shall remain in place for at least 14 consecutive calendar days.

6-02.3(12) Construction Joints

6-02.3(12)A Construction Joints in New Construction

If the Engineer allows, the Contractor may add, delete, or relocate construction joints shown in the Plans. All requests for such changes shall be in writing, accompanied by a drawing that depicts them and shall be submitted as an RFI in accordance with Section

1-05.1(2) The Contractor will bear all added costs that result from such changes.

M 41-10 Page 6-39 Concrete Structures 6-02All construction joints shall be formed neatly with grade strips or other accepted methods. The Contracting Agency will not accept irregular or wavy pour lines. All joints shall be horizontal, vertical, or perpendicular to the main reinforcement. The Contractor shall not use an edger on construction joints, and shall remove all lips or edging before making the adjacent pour. If the Plans require a roughened surface on the joint, the Contractor shall strike it off to leave grooves at right angles to the length of the member. Grooves shall be installed using one of the following options:

1.Grooves shall be ½ to 1 inch wide, ¼ to ½ inch deep, and spaced equally at twice the width of the groove. Grooves shall terminate approximately 1½-inches from the face of concrete.
2.Grooves shall be 1 to 2 inches wide, a minimum of ½-inch deep, and spaced a maximum of three times the width of the groove. Grooves shall terminate approximately 1½-inches from the face of concrete. If the Engineer allows, the Contractor may use an alternate method to produce a roughened surface on the joint, provided that such an alternate method leaves a roughened surface of at least a ¼-inch amplitude. If the first strike-off does not produce the required roughness, the Contractor shall repeat the process before the concrete reaches initial set. The final surface shall be clean and without laitance or loose material. If the Plans do not require a roughened surface, the Contractor shall include shear keys at all construction joints. These keys shall provide a positive, mechanical bond. Shear keys shall be formed depressions and the forms shall not be removed until the concrete has been in place at least 12 hours. Forms shall be slightly beveled to ensure ready removal. Raised shear keys are not allowed. Shear keys for the tops of beams, at tops and bottoms of boxed girder webs, in diaphragms, and in crossbeams shall:
1.Be formed with 2 by 8-inch wood blocks;
2.Measure 8 inches lengthwise along the beam or girder stem;
3.Measure 4 inches less than the width of the stem, beam, crossbeam, etc. (measured transverse of the stem); and
4.Be spaced at 16 inches center to center. Unless the Plans show otherwise, in other locations (not named above), shear keys shall equal approximately ⅓ of the joint area and shall be approximately 1½ inches deep. Before placing fresh concrete against cured concrete, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean and saturate the cured surface. All loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of any sort shall be removed by method(s) as accepted by the Engineer. The cleaned surface shall be saturated with water for a minimum of four hours before the fresh concrete is placed. Before placing the reinforcing mat for footings on seals, the Contractor shall: (1) remove all scum, laitance, and loose gravel and sediment; (2) clean the construction joint at the top of the seals; and (3) chip off all high spots on the seals that would prevent the footing steel from being placed in the position required by the Plans.

6-02.3(12)B Construction Joints Between Existing and New Construction

If the Plans or Special Provisions require a roughened surface on the joint, the Contractor shall thoroughly roughen the existing surface to a uniformly distributed ¼-inch minimum amplitude surface profile, with peaks spaced at a maximum of 1 inch. Page 6-40 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresIf the Plans or Special Provisions do not require a roughened surface on the joint, the

Contractor shall remove all loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of any sort. Before placing fresh concrete against existing concrete, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean and saturate the existing surface. All loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of any sort shall be removed. The cleaned surface shall be saturated with water for a minimum of 4 hours before the fresh concrete is placed.

6-02.3(13) Expansion Joints

This section outlines the requirements of specific expansion joints shown in the Plans. The Plans may require other types of joints, seals, or materials than those described here. Joints made of a vulcanized, elastomeric compound (with neoprene as the only polymer) shall be installed with a lubricant adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. The length of a seal shall match that required in the Plans without splicing or stretching. Open joints shall be formed with a template made of wood, metal, or other suitable material. Insertion and removal of the template shall be done without chipping or breaking the edges or otherwise damaging the concrete. Any part of an expansion joint running parallel to the direction of expansion shall provide a clearance of at least ½ inch (produced by inserting and removing a spacer strip) between the two surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that the surfaces are precisely parallel to prevent wedging from expansion and contraction. All poured rubber joint sealer (and any required primer) shall conform with Section 9-04.2(2) .

6-02.3(13)A Strip Seal Expansion Joint System

The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the strip seal expansion joint shop drawings. These plans shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1.Plan, elevation, and sections of the joint system and all components, with dimensions and tolerances.
2.All material designations.
3.Manufacturer’s written installation procedure. The installation procedure shall indicate how the extrusions set into the two sides of the joint will be allowed to move independently of one another.
4.Corrosion protection system used on the metal components.
5.Locations of welded shear studs, lifting mechanisms, temperature setting devices, and construction adjustment devices.
6.Method of sealing the system to prevent leakage of water through the joint.
7.Details of the temporary supports for the steel extrusions while the encapsulating concrete of the headers is placed and cured.
8.The gland installation procedure, including the means and methods used to install the gland and assure correct seating of the gland within the steel extrusions. The strip seal shall be removable and replaceable. The metal components shall conform to ASTM A36, ASTM A992, or ASTM A572, and shall be protected against corrosion by one of the following methods:
1.Zinc metallized in accordance with Section 6-07.3(14) .
2.Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111.
3.Paint in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9) . The color of the top coat shall be SAE AMS Standard 595 Color No. 26357. The surfaces embedded in concrete shall be painted only with a shop primer coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)C . M 41-10 Page 6-41 Concrete Structures 6-02If the gland is installed in the field, the Contractor shall have the services of a strip seal expansion joint system manufacturer’s technical representative physically present at the job site. The manufacturer’s technical representative shall train the Contractor’s personnel performing the field installation of the gland, provide technical assistance for installing the gland, and observe and inspect the installation of at least the first complete joint. The strip seal gland shall be continuous for the full length of the joint with no splices permitted, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Other than items shown in the Plans, threaded studs used for construction adjustments are the only items that may be welded to the steel shapes provided they are removed by grinding after use, and the area repaired by application of an accepted corrosion protection system. After the expansion joint system is installed, a watertightness test shall be performed as follows. The Contractor shall flood each completely installed expansion joint system with water to a minimum depth of three inches for a duration of at least one hour. If leakage is observed, the expansion joint system shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency, as recommended by the manufacturer. After repairs are completed, the expansion joint shall be retested for leakage.

6-02.3(13)B Compression Seal Expansion Joint System

Compression seal glands shall conform to Section 9-04.1(4) and be sized as shown in the Plans. The compression seal expansion joint system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s written installation procedure and repair procedures if leakage testing fails. After the expansion joint system is installed, a watertightness test shall be performed as follows. The Contractor shall flood each completely installed expansion joint system with water to a minimum depth of three inches for a duration of at least one hour. If leakage is observed, the expansion joint system shall be repaired at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency, as recommended by the manufacturer. After repairs are completed, the expansion joint shall be retested for leakage.

6-02.3(13)C Modular Expansion Joint System

The Contractor shall design, fabricate, inspect, test, and install a modular, multiple seal expansion joint system in accordance with the geometry and movements shown and specified in the Plans. The modular expansion joint system shall extend continuously across the full width of the bridge deck and up into the traffic barriers as shown in the Plans.

6-02.3(13)C1 Acceptable Manufacturers

Only manufacturers whose modular expansion joint systems have met the requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C9 will be permitted to supply modular expansion joint systems. Testing required to establish the fatigue resistance of all details of a specific proprietary system shall be completed prior to the Contract Award date. All fatigue testing shall be conducted in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(13)C11 , 6-02.3(13)C23 , and

6-02.3(13)C26 Testing shall be completed on all revised details or material substitutions

of a previously prequalified system prior to the Contract award date. Manufacturers known to have met the requirements of Section 6-02.3(13)C9 are specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C as supplemented in the Special Provisions. Page 6-42 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(13)C2 Submittals

The expansion joint manufacturer shall have at least three years of experience in designing and manufacturing modular expansion joint systems. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of written certification of the manufacturer’s experience, including the location of each bridge, installation date, governmental agency/owner, and the name, address, and telephone number of each owner’s/ agency’s representative. The Contractor shall submit the name of the selected expansion joint system manufacturer to the Engineer within 10 days of Contract award. Once the name of the manufacturer has been submitted to the Engineer, the Contractor shall not select an alternative expansion joint system manufacturer unless the manufacturer demonstrates an inability to meet the requirements of Section 6-02.3(13)C . The Contractor shall submit Type 3E Working Drawings consisting of shop drawings and design calculations delineating the expansion joint system in accordance with Sections

1-05.3 and 6-03.3(7) and as noted herein. The Professional Engineer responsible for

preparing and stamping the submittal shall be an employee of the expansion joint system manufacturer, and shall hold a valid license in the branch of Civil or Structural Engineering, either in the State of Washington or another state. These submittals shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1.Plan, elevation, and section of the joint system for each movement rating and bridge deck width. All dimensions and tolerances shall be specified.
2.Sections showing all materials composing the expansion joint system with complete details of all individual components including all bolted and welded splices and connections.
3.All ASTM, AASHTO, or other material designations.
4.Installation plan including sequence, lifting mechanisms and locations, details of temporary anchorage during setting, temperature adjustment devices, opening dimensions relative to temperature, installation details at curbs, and seal installation details.
5.Plan for achieving watertightness including details related to performing the watertightness test required in Section 6-02.3(13)C32 .
6.Details and material designations pertinent to the corrosion protection system.
7.Requirements and details related to the temporary support of the joint system for shipping, handling, and job site storage.
8.Design calculations for all structural elements including all springs and bearings. The design calculations shall include fatigue design for all structural elements, connections, and splices.
9.Welding procedures in compliance with the current AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code.
10.A written maintenance and part replacement plan to facilitate replacement of parts subject to wear. This plan shall include a list of parts, instructions for maintenance inspection, acceptable wear tolerances, methods for determining wear, procedures for replacing worn parts, and procedures for replacing seals.
11.Comprehensive integrated details of the expansion joint system, its support boxes, assembly supports, erection aids, and the bridge deck and expansion joint header steel reinforcing bars. The Contractor shall identify in the integrated details all modifications to the bridge deck steel reinforcing bars necessary to accommodate the expansion joint system. The Contractor shall show, in the integrated details, the specific means (moving, bending, cutting, bundling, supplementing or coupling steel M 41-10 Page 6-43 Concrete Structures 6-02reinforcing bars, or incorporating hooks or headed steel reinforcing bars) to address congestion and conflicts.
12.Means, methods, and concrete placement sequence for placing concrete and attaining full consolidation of concrete beneath and adjacent to the support boxes of the modular expansion joint assembly. The methods and sequence shall account for congestion surrounding the box sections due to bridge deck steel reinforcing bars, and expansion joint assembly supports and erection aids. At the time of shop plan submittal as outlined above, the Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the following documentation:
1.Documentation that the manufacturer is certified through the AISC Quality Certification Program under the category Bridge and Highway Metal Components.
2.Documentation that welding inspection personnel are qualified and certified as welding inspectors under AWS QC1, Standard for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors.
3.Documentation that personnel performing nondestructive testing (NDT) are qualified and certified as NDT Level II under the American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1a. The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the following test reports and certificates of compliance:
1.Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for all polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) sheeting, PTFE fabric, and elastomer.
2.Certified mill test reports for all steel and stainless steel in the expansion joint system assemblies.
3.Certified test reports confirming that the springs and bearings meet the design load requirements. Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of certification stating that each expansion joint system was installed in accordance with the shop plan installation procedure. This certification shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C32 . The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of a temporary bridging method for each expansion joint system over which construction traffic is anticipated to cross following its installation. This submittal shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C32 . The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of a Quality Assurance Inspection program performed by an independent inspection agency provided by the manufacturer. The name of the independent inspection agency, details of the proposed quality assurance inspection program including inspection frequency, and all applicable reporting forms shall be included in the Type 1 Working Drawing submittal. Modular expansion joint assembly warranties and guarantees provided by the manufacturer in accordance with Section 1-05.10 shall be submitted as Type 1 Working Drawings.

6-02.3(13)C3 General Design Requirements

The expansion joint system shall be designed and detailed with adequate access to all internal components in order to assure the feasibility of inspection and maintenance activities. The expansion joint system shall be designed and detailed to minimize concrete cracking above the support boxes. Measures taken shall include, but not be limited to, assuring adequate support box top plate thickness, specifying any additional bridge deck steel reinforcement required, and providing adequate concrete cover. Page 6-44 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe expansion joint system and bridge deck steel reinforcement shall be detailed to assure

that adequate concrete consolidation can be achieved underneath all support boxes. The expansion joint seals shall not protrude above the top of the expansion joint system under any service condition. Split extrusions may be used at curb upturns. The elastomeric or urethane springs and bearings shall be designed to be removable and replaceable. The removal and reinstallation of each strip seal shall be easily accomplished from above the joint with a 1-1/4 inch minimum gap width. These operations shall be viable with a one lane partial closure of the bridge deck. The expansion joint system shall be designed and detailed to be watertight. The expansion joint system shall be designed and detailed to accommodate all movements specified in the Plans. The expansion joint shall be designed and detailed to mitigate the potential for fatigue damage wherever centerbeam field splices are required. Consideration shall be given to reducing support box spacing and optimizing splice location between adjacent support boxes in order to minimize fatigue stress range at field splices.

6-02.3(13)C4 Design Axle Loads and Impact Factors

The centerbeams, support bars, bearings, connections, and other structural components shall be designed for the simultaneous application of vertical and horizontal loads from a tandem axle. The tandem axle shall consist of a pair of axles spaced four feet apart with vertical and horizontal loads as specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C as supplemented in the Special Provisions. The transverse spacing of the wheels shall be six feet. The distribution of the wheel load among centerbeams shall be as specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C5 .

6-02.3(13)C5 Distribution of Wheel Loads

The following table specifies the centerbeam distribution factor as a function of centerbeam top flange width. This factor is the percentage of the design vertical axle load and the design horizontal axle load that shall be applied to an individual centerbeam for the design of that centerbeam and its associated support bars. Distribution factors shall be interpolated for centerbeam top flange widths between those explicitly denoted in the table. In no case shall the distribution factor be taken as less than 50%. The remainder of the load shall be divided equally and applied to the two adjacent centerbeams or edge beams. Width of Centerbeam Top Flange Distribution Factor 2.5 inches 50% 3.0 inches 60% 4.0 inches 70% 4.75 inches 80%

6-02.3(13)C6 Fatigue Limit State Design Requirements

Modular expansion joint system structural members, bolted and welded splices and connections, and attachments shall be designed to resist the Fatigue Limit State load combination specified in Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The vertical and horizontal load ranges specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C4 shall be applied simultaneously. These loads shall be distributed as specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C5 . The nominal stress ranges, ∆f, at all fatigue critical details shall be obtained from a structural analysis of the expansion joint system applying the design vertical and horizontal load ranges specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C4 and distributed as specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C5 . The expansion joint system shall be analyzed with a minimum gap opening corresponding to the midrange configuration (at least half of the maximum gap opening). The design axle load shall be applied as two wheel loads, each having a transverse width of 20 inches. M 41-10 Page 6-45 Concrete Structures 6-02For each detail under consideration, the wheel loads shall be positioned transversely on a centerbeam to achieve the maximum nominal stress range at that detail. The vertical and horizontal wheel loads shall be applied as line loads to the top of the centerbeams at their centerlines. The design stress range in the centerbeam-to-support bar connection shall be calculated as specified below. The design nominal stress ranges, ∆f, multiplied by the appropriate load factors in Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, shall be used for fatigue design as specified at the end of this subsection.

6-02.3(13)C7 Welded or Bolted Single-Support-Bar Systems

The nominal stress range, ∆f, in the centerbeam at a welded or bolted stirrup shall be the sum of the longitudinal bending stress ranges at the critical section resulting from vertical and horizontal loading. The effects of stresses in any load-bearing attachments such as the stirrup or yoke shall not be considered when calculating the longitudinal stress range in the centerbeam. For bolted single-support-bar systems, stress ranges shall be calculated using the net section. The nominal stress range, ∆f, in the stirrup or yoke shall be calculated without considering the effects of stresses in the centerbeam. The stress range shall be calculated by assuming a load range in the stirrup equal to 30% of the total vertical reaction force between the centerbeam and the support bar. The effects of horizontal loads may be neglected in the design of the stirrup.

6-02.3(13)C8 Welded Multiple-Support-Bar Systems

Three locations have been identified as initiation sites for fatigue cracking at a centerbeam-to-support bar welded connection. The types of cracking associated with these three locations are described below. The corresponding equations may be used to calculate the nominal stress range, ∆f. For the support bar, either the reduced moment at the critical cross section or the moment at the centerline of the connection may be used in these equations. Centerbeam weld toe cracking is driven by a combination of longitudinal bending stress range, SRB, in the centerbeam, and vertical stress range, SRZ, at the top of the connection weld. The longitudinal bending stress range, SRB, at the bottom of the centerbeam shall be calculated as: SRB = MVcb / SXcb + MHcb / SYcb The vertical stress range, SRZ, at the top of the connection weld shall be calculated as: SRZ = RH∙ dcb / SWtop + RV / AWtop Support bar weld toe cracking is driven by a combination of longitudinal bending stress range, SRB, in the support bar and vertical stress range, SRZ, at the bottom of the connection weld. The longitudinal bending stress range, SRB, at the top of the support bar shall be calculated as: SRB = MVsb / SXsb + 0.5 ∙ RH ∙ (dcb + hW + 0.5 ∙ dsb) / SXsb The vertical stress range, SRZ, at the bottom of the connection weld shall be calculated as: SRZ = RH ∙ (dcb + hW) / Swbot + RV / AWbot Weld throat cracking is driven by a vertical stress range at the weld throat. Page 6-46 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe vertical stress range, SRZ, at mid-height of the connection weld shall be calculated as:

SRZ = RV / Awmid + RH ∙ (dcb + 0.5 ∙ hW) / SWmid In the above equations: RV = vertical reaction at the connection weld RH = horizontal reaction at the connection weld MVcb = bending moment in the centerbeam due to applied vertical forces MHcb = bending moment in the centerbeam due to applied horizontal forces MVsb = bending moment in the support bar due to applied vertical forces SXcb = section modulus at bottom of the centerbeam about horizontal axis SYcb = section modulus of the centerbeam about vertical axis SXsb = section modulus at top of the support bar about horizontal axis AWtop = area of the weld at the top of the connection AWmid = area of the weld at the middle of the connection AWbot = area of the weld at the bottom of the connection SWtop = section modulus of the weld at the top of the connection SWmid = section modulus of the weld at the middle of the connection SWbot = section modulus of the weld at the bottom of the connection hW = height of the weld dcb = depth of the centerbeam dsb = depth of the support bar The nominal stress range, ∆f, at welded multiple-support-bar connection details shall be calculated for each case above as follows: ∆f = (S2 RB + S2 RZ)1/2 Where: SRB = longitudinal stress range in the centerbeam or support bar, as calculated for each specific case above. SRZ = vertical stress range in the centerbeam-to-support bar connection weld, as calculated for each specific case above. All modular expansion joint system structural members, connections (bolted and welded), splices, and attachments shall satisfy the following: γ∆f = (ΔF)TH Where: γ = the load factor for the Fatigue I Limit State, as stipulated in Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Δf = the nominal stress range as specified at the beginning of this subsection. (ΔF)TH = constant amplitude fatigue threshold (CAFL) as specified in

6-02.3(13)C9 Fatigue Resistance Characterization Requirements

The fatigue resistance of all details shall be characterized in terms of the detail categories specified in Table 6.6.1.2.5-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Many details composing modular expansion joint systems may clearly correspond to specific structural details depicted in Figure 6.6.1.2.3-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. In these cases, the applicable fatigue categories specified in Table 6.6.1.2.3-1 may be used for design. In cases where the Engineer establishes that a detail does not clearly correspond to a structural detail depicted in Figure 6.6.1.2.3-1, fatigue testing of specimens exhibiting that detail shall be conducted, in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(13)C11 , M 41-10 Page 6-47 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(13)C23 , and 6-02.3(13)C26 , to establish the appropriate constant amplitude fatigue limit (CAFL) for that detail.

6-02.3(13)C10 Strength I Limit State Design Requirements

Modular expansion joint system structural steel members, connections (bolted and welded), splices, and attachments shall be designed to resist the Strength I Limit State load combination specified in Table 3.4.1-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The vertical and horizontal loads specified in Section

6-02.3(13)C4 shall be applied simultaneously. These loads shall be distributed as specified

in Section 6-02.3(13)C5 .

6-02.3(13)C11 Fatigue Testing of Metallic Structural Components and Connections

This test procedure is acceptable for, and specifically applicable to, establishing the fatigue resistance of the centerbeam-to-support bar connection in modular expansion joint systems. It is applicable to single-support-bar and multiple-support-bar systems having either welded or bolted centerbeam-to-support bar connections. The same methodology may be applied to establish the fatigue resistance of other modular expansion joint metallic structural component details, including centerbeam splices. Each fatigue test generates a discrete datum. Each datum comprises an applied constant amplitude nominal stress range, Sr, and the corresponding number of cycles, N, associated with either a predetermined extent of crack propagation, defined as failure, or with termination of the test, defined as runout. Ten data shall be acquired for each connection detail. All data shall be in the very long life range, corresponding as closely to the constant amplitude fatigue limit (CAFL) as practical. Specifically, the number of cycles, N, associated with each datum, shall be no less than one order of magnitude less than Nmin corresponding to the detail category specific CAFL specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C19 . For example, to characterize a detail as Detail Category C, the tested number of cycles, N, shall exceed 4.4 x 105 for each datum. The constant amplitude nominal stress range shall be calculated at the anticipated initiation location of an incipient crack. Nominal stresses shall be calculated using conventional equations for analyzing bending and axial load. These equations are essentially the same as those used in strength design. The stress concentration effects of a weld, bolt hole, or other local features are not explicitly embodied in the conventional nominal stress equations. The appropriate AASHTO detail category applicable to fatigue design shall be established by comparing acquired test data to fatigue resistance graphs representing the AASHTO detail categories. The constant amplitude fatigue limit (CAFL) applicable to fatigue design corresponds to the AASHTO detail category fatigue resistance graph representing a lower bound of the experimentally acquired data. When testing is conducted exclusively in the infinite life regime and more stringent test data scatter requirements are satisfied, a unique CAFL (different from those CAFL corresponding to specific detail categories specified by AASHTO) may be established for fatigue design. Specimens selected for testing shall be full-scale centerbeam and support bar assemblies or subassemblies representative of those installed in field applications. A subassembly is defined as a specimen having the same physical and geometric properties as an assembly but having a reduced number of centerbeams. Each specimen shall consist of three continuous centerbeam spans over four equally spaced support bars. Centerbeam spans between adjacent support bar centerlines shall be a minimum of 3’-0” and a maximum of 4’-6”. Support bar spans shall be a minimum of 3’-0” and a maximum of 3’-8”. The centerbeam-to-support bar connection being tested shall be located at the midspan of each support bar. Page 6-48 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresAll welded or bolted attachments used to secure equidistant springs to a support bar,

centerbeam, or stirrup shall be fabricated as an integral part of the specimen. A rigid load path to the test fixture shall be provided to resist any horizontal forces or displacements which would normally be resisted through these attachments in a field installation. All miscellaneous welded or bolted attachments, including welded attachments used to secure the expansion joint strip seals to the centerbeams, shall also be fabricated as integral parts of the specimen. Support bars of subassembly specimens that are components of single-support-bar swivel-joist type modular expansion joint systems shall be oriented perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the centerbeam. Prior to testing, each specimen shall be visually inspected for defects, loose fasteners or other aberrations which could plausibly affect the tested fatigue resistance. Defects and flaws shall be defined in accordance with the appropriate governing specification (ASTM A6, AWS D1.5, etc.). Data acquired from specimens containing such anomalies shall not be excluded from consideration except as permitted in Section 6-02.3(13)C20 . Observed anomalies shall also be reported with its corresponding data in the tabular format stipulated in Section 6-02.3(13)C22 . Each specimen shall be sufficiently instrumented to measure the static nominal strain range within that specimen for a specific applied load range. Best results can generally be obtained when the applied load range for the static calibration tests does not pass through zero load. Strain measurements shall be made at locations sufficiently distant from local effects, such as weld toes or bolt holes, which could significantly influence acquired test data. As a minimum, eight strain gages shall be installed on the centerbeam top flange in the vicinity of each centerbeam-to-support bar connection. These gages shall be installed in pairs on each side of the connection at distances of one and two times the depth of the centerbeam from the centerline of the connection. Each pair of strain gages shall be located symmetrically about the centerline of the centerbeam. As a minimum, two strain gages shall also be installed on the support bar bottom flange in the vicinity of each centerbeam-to-support bar connection. One of these strain gages shall be installed on each side of the connection at a distance equal to the depth of the support bar from the centerline of the connection. These strain gages shall be installed along the centerline of the support bar.

6-02.3(13)C12 Fatigue Testing Test Fixtures

Test fixtures shall have the capability to adequately support and secure the specimen throughout the duration of the test. The fixture shall be designed and fabricated to such tolerances as required to assure that additional stresses will not be generated in the specimen as a consequence of fixture misalignment. Mismatches resulting from specimen fabrication errors shall be accommodated by shimming or other such means precluding the application of force to the specimen. Typical elastomeric bearings and springs used to transfer vertical loads from the support bars to the support boxes may be replaced with steel bearings in the test fixture. This modification will enable fatigue testing at higher load ranges and different frequencies than those encountered during normal service conditions. Load shall be applied through two 10-inch long patches. Each patch shall typically comprise a steel plate and a hard rubber bearing pad placed in contact with the bottom flange of the centerbeam. Each patch shall be located at midspan of each outer span. In order to assure adequate seating of the specimen to the test fixture, a minimum of 10 kips shall be applied at each patch location. This requirement is waived for tests of single support bar systems conducted using load reversal. Once this load has been applied, all strain measuring devices shall be rebalanced to zero strain while the preload M 41-10 Page 6-49 Concrete Structures 6-02is maintained. An additional load approximately equivalent to the calculated load range shall be applied. Strain ranges shall be measured for the load range from 10 kips to the peak load. Each static calibration test shall be repeated three times while still maintaining a minimum 10 kips load at each load patch. The measured strain ranges from each repetition should vary by no more than 25% from the mean value. If the stress ranges are not repeatable, appropriate modifications shall be made to the test fixture.

6-02.3(13)C13 Static Calibration Test

Prior to fatigue resistance testing, a static calibration test shall be performed in order to validate the structural analysis model. The static calibration test shall be performed after attainment of stress range repeatability as described in Section 6-02.3(13)C12 . The structural analysis model shall be considered validated when calculated strain ranges are within ±25% of the measured strain ranges at every strain gage location. For the purpose of reporting nominal fatigue resistance stress ranges at specific details, stress ranges determined through structural analysis of the model shall be preferred over stress ranges acquired directly from test measurements.

6-02.3(13)C14 Fatigue Test Procedure

A minimum of ten data points shall be required to establish the fatigue resistance of each detail. The centerbeam-to-support bar connection shall be considered as a single detail. Several data points may be obtained from a single specimen by repairing the cracked sections of that specimen and resuming testing. Such repairs shall have minimal effect on the stress ranges at unfailed details still being tested. Data points derived from tests in which a repaired detail cracks again shall be discarded. All data shall be in the very long life range, corresponding as closely to the constant amplitude fatigue limit as practical, but in no case less than 200,000 cycles. Either finite life regime or infinite life regime testing may be conducted. For infinite life regime testing, the number of cycles, N, associated with each of the ten data shall be at least twice the number of cycles, Nmin, designated in the table in Section 6-02.3(13)C19 . Loads shall be applied using hydraulic actuators or other similar loading devices. The magnitude of the vertical load range, ∆Pv, shall be maintained and continuously monitored throughout the duration of the test. Vertical and horizontal load ranges shall be applied to the specimen simultaneously. The horizontal load range shall always be equal to 20% of the vertical load range, ∆Pv. This horizontal-to-vertical load ratio may be maintained by inclining the specimen 11.3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane and applying load through vertically oriented actuators. For multiple support bar systems, the loading mechanism shall be either exclusively tension or exclusively compression and shall be applied at a constant amplitude at any desired frequency. The applied load range shall be in a direction such that the reaction force between the centerbeam and support bar is always tensile. The load range shall not pass through zero load. Minimum preload shall be maintained throughout the duration of the test. Single support bar systems may be loaded using the same procedures as those for multiple support bar systems. If premature stirrup failure occurs, an applied load range of 70% compression and 30% tension may be used. The load ranges used in the test shall not be so large as to alter the observed failure mode from that which would be observed under service conditions. Under no circumstance shall imposed stress exceed the yield stress of the material in any portion of the specimen. Each specimen shall be tested using at least two different load (stress) ranges. If infinite life regime testing is conducted, the first load range should be chosen so that the applied stress range is just above the postulated CAFL. The load range in the subsequent test shall be decreased if failure resulted and increased if the test resulted in a runout. A Page 6-50 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuressuggested increment in load is such that the stress range is increased or decreased by 2

ksi. The applicable CAFL shall be selected from those CAFL values corresponding to the AASHTO fatigue categories. The selected CAFL is the one just below the lowest stress range that resulted in cracking.

6-02.3(13)C15 Fatigue Test Failure Criteria

Failure in welded centerbeam-to-support bar connection specimens includes the following: Centerbeam weld toe cracking originates at or near the centerbeam weld toe, propagates up into the centerbeam at some angle, and grows back over the connection. These cracks typically grow at an angle of about 45 degrees. A specimen shall be considered as failed due to this type of cracking when the crack has grown on any vertical face a length from the point of origin equal to half of the centerbeam depth. Support bar weld toe cracking originates at or near the support bar weld toe, propagates down into the support bar, and grows back under the connection at some angle, typically about 45 degrees. A specimen shall be considered as failed due to this type of cracking when the crack has grown on any vertical support bar face a length from the point of origin equal to half of the depth of the support bar. Weld throat cracking originates in the weld throat and typically grows in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis of the support bar at about mid-depth of the weld throat. A specimen shall be considered as failed due to this type of cracking when a complete fracture of the weld throat has occurred. These cracks have been observed to turn down into the support bar, but only after significant growth. In such instances, the criteria for support bar weld toe cracking shall be applied. A welded stirrup connection specimen shall be considered as failed when cracks result in the complete fracture of a stirrup leg or when cracks originating at or near a stirrup weld have grown into any face of the centerbeam a length from the stirrup weld toe equal to half of the centerbeam depth. A bolted centerbeam-to-support bar connection specimen shall be considered as failed when:

1.Fatigue cracks which have grown out of a bolt hole have resulted in the complete fracture of the tension flange of the centerbeam.
2.Fatigue cracks which have grown out of a bolt hole have extended into any face of the centerbeam web a distance equivalent to half of the centerbeam depth less the centerbeam flange thickness.
3.A portion of a stirrup fractures completely.
4.A single bolt fractures completely.

6-02.3(13)C16 Alternate Criteria for Termination of a Finite Life Regime Fatigue Test

A test may also be terminated when, for a given stress range, the specimen has survived the number of cycles required to plot the data above either a particular fatigue resistance curve or the maximum permitted in Section 6-02.3(13)C20 . For example, if the applied stress range is 17 ksi and the desired fatigue resistance curve is Category C, then based upon the equation presented in Section 6-02.3(13)C19 , the test may be terminated after application of about 900,000 cycles provided that the specimen has not failed based on the above described criteria.

6-02.3(13)C17 Nominal Stress Range for Welded Centerbeam-to-Support Bar Systems

The nominal stress range for centerbeam weld toe cracking shall be calculated by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the longitudinal bending stress range in the centerbeam and the vertical stress range at the top of the weld. M 41-10 Page 6-51 Concrete Structures 6-02The nominal stress range for support bar weld toe cracking shall be calculated by taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the longitudinal bending stress range in the support bar and the vertical stress range at the bottom of the weld. The nominal stress range for weld throat cracking shall be the calculated vertical stress range in the throat of the weld. The nominal stress range in the centerbeam at a welded stirrup shall be calculated as the summation of the longitudinal bending stress ranges at the critical section resulting from vertical and horizontal loading. The entire load range shall be used in the calculation, even if the loading is partly in compression. The effects of stresses in the load-bearing attachments such as the stirrup or yoke shall not be considered when calculating the nominal stress range in the centerbeam. The load range in the stirrup itself shall be taken as 30% of the total vertical load range carried through the connection. The effect of horizontal forces may be neglected.

6-02.3(13)C18 Nominal Stress Range for Bolted Centerbeam-to-Support Bar Systems

The nominal stress range in the centerbeam shall be taken as the summation of the longitudinal bending stress ranges in the centerbeam resulting from vertical and horizontal loading. Nominal stress ranges shall be calculated using the net section. The effects of stresses in the stirrup shall not be considered when calculating the nominal stress range in the centerbeam. The nominal load range in the bolt group and the stirrup assembly shall be taken as 30% of the total vertical load range carried through the connection. The effect of horizontal forces may be neglected.

6-02.3(13)C19 Interpretation of Fatigue Test Data

The experimentally acquired data and graphs representing the fatigue resistance of the detail categories delineated in Section 6.6 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, shall be juxtaposed on a log-log scale. The equation representing the finite life fatigue resistance of these AASHTO detail categories is: N = A / S3 r,eff Where: N = number of cycles to failure. Sr,eff = nominal effective stress range representing fatigue resistance. A = constant defined in Table 6.6.1.2.5-1 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The minimum number of cycles associated with infinite fatigue life, Nmin, and the corresponding constant amplitude fatigue limit (CAFL) for each AASHTO detail category is designated in the table below. Detail Category Nmin (infinite fatigue life) CAFL(ksi) A 1.8 x 106 cycles 24 B 3.0 x 106 cycles 16 B' 3.5 x 106 cycles 12 C 4.4 x 106 cycles 10 C' 2.5 x 106 cycles 12 D 6.4 x 106 cycles 7.0 E 1.2 x 107 cycles 4.5 E' 2.2 x 107 cycles 2.6 Page 6-52 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(13)C20 Finite Life Regime Testing

The number of cycles, N, to either failure or runout, associated with each of the ten data need not exceed Nmin, designated in the table in Section 6-02.3(13)C19 . The detail category applicable to fatigue design shall be that corresponding to the highest of the AASHTO detail category fatigue resistance graphs representing a lower bound of all ten experimentally acquired data. If all but one datum falls above a selected AASHTO S-N curve, that one datum may be discarded and replaced by three new data obtained through additional testing. The additional testing shall be conducted using the same stress range as that of the discarded datum. The three additional data shall be plotted along with the remaining nine data. The applicable detail category shall be that corresponding to the highest of the AASHTO detail category fatigue resistance graphs representing a lower bound of all twelve data, except as limited in the previous table. For any detail, only one datum may be discarded and subsequently replaced with three additional data for any set of ten original data. The maximum fatigue resistance of any detail shall not exceed that associated with the fatigue category prescribed in the table below. Type of DetailMaximum Permitted Category Welded Multiple Centerbeam-to-Support Bar Connections C Weld Stirrup Attachments for Single Support Bar Systems B Bolted Stirrup Attachments for Single Support Bar Systems D Groove Welded Centerbeam Splices1 C Miscellaneous Welded Connections2C Miscellaneous Bolted Connections D 1Groove welded full penetration splices may be increased to Category B if weld integrity is verified using non-destructive testing (NDT). 2Miscellaneous connections include attachments for equidistant devices. The fatigue resistance for stirrups welded to a centerbeam flange shall not be taken greater than that defined using the fatigue details defined in Section 6.6 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The applicable fatigue detail for the centerbeam flange and for the stirrup shall be either a “Longitudinally Loaded Groove-Welded Attachment” or a “Longitudinally Loaded Fillet-Welded Attachment”, depending upon the type of connection used.

6-02.3(13)C21 Infinite Life Regime Testing

The applicable constant amplitude fatigue limit (CAFL) for fatigue design may be selected as the highest CAFL of the AASHTO detail categories representing a lower bound to the experimentally acquired data. The CAFL of the AASHTO detail categories are designated in the table in Section 6-02.3(13)C19 . A unique CAFL (different from the CAFL categories delineated in Section 6.6 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications) may be established if all ten data are within 4 ksi of that unique CAFL.

6-02.3(13)C22 Data Reporting for Fatigue Tests

Fatigue test results and observations shall be reported in the typical S-N format (logarithm

S.vs. logarithm (N)) with the log of the stress range plotted as the ordinate (y-axis). Additionally, the data shall be reported in tabular format. The table shall contain the following information: M 41-10 Page 6-53 Concrete Structures 6-021. Nominal stress range at the specific detail, Sr,eff.
2.Applied load range for each patch.
3.Number of cycles at initial observation of cracking (for reporting purposes only, not included as S-N data).
4.Number of cycles at failure or termination of the test, N, and the reason for stopping the test (failure or termination).
5.Type of crack as described in Section 6-02.3(13)C15 . A detailed description of the fatigue crack shall be provided if the observed crack does not resemble any of the crack types described in Section 6-02.3(13)C15 . The following information shall also be reported:
1.Expansion joint system type and manufacturer.
2.Drawings depicting shape, size, and dimensions of the specimen.
3.Drawings depicting fixture details, including specimen orientation.
4.Section properties and dimensions of the centerbeam and support bar.
5.Centerbeam-to-support bar connection details:
a.Weld procedure specifications for welded expansion joint systems.
b.Bolt size, material specifications, location, and method of tightening for bolted expansion joint systems.

6-02.3(13)C23 Durability Testing of Elastomeric Support Bearings

This subsection provides guidelines for durability testing of the elastomeric support bearings typically used in modular expansion joint systems as specified In Sections 6-02.3(13)C24 and 6-02.3(13)C25 . It is not applicable to compression springs, equidistant springs, or other elastomeric components. Tests shall be performed dynamically on individual bearings. Fatigue life is evaluated by applying a displacement range to each specimen rather than a load or stress range. Specimens shall comprise full scale bearing components representative of those installed in field applications. PTFE sliding surfaces or materials typically bonded to the elastomeric support bearings shall be fabricated as an integral part of the specimen. Prior to testing, each specimen shall be visually inspected for flaws or defects that could plausibly affect fatigue resistance. All flaws or details shall be defined and recorded. Data obtained from specimens containing such anomalies shall not be excluded from the data set. Observed anomalies shall also be reported with the test data. Test fixtures shall have the capability to adequately support and secure the specimen throughout the duration of the test. The fixture shall be designed and fabricated to such tolerances as required to assure that additional stresses will not be generated in the specimen as a consequence of fixture misalignment. Loads shall be applied through hydraulic actuators or other similar loading devices. Fatigue testing shall be performed using displacement control. Displacement and load ranges shall be continuously monitored throughout the duration of the fatigue test to assure that desired displacement range and minimum preload are maintained. Load shall be applied to the specimen through flat steel plates that are smooth and free of surface corrosion. These plates shall be sufficiently thick to assure even load distribution to the specimen. Page 6-54 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(13)C24 Dynamic Stiffness Test

Testing shall be conducted on each specimen to be subjected to fatigue testing in order to establish its dynamic stiffness for at least three different loading frequencies. The maximum of these loading frequencies shall be equal to the service load frequency corresponding to a vehicle traveling at 60 mph. The loading frequency, f, shall be calculated as: f = 0.5 ∙ V / (g + b) where V = vehicle speed (60 mph at service load) g = centerbeam gap (assume mid-range configuration) b = centerbeam width The load range applied during the dynamic stiffness test shall be that obtained from structural analysis using fatigue wheel load and wheel load distribution factors as specified in Sections 6-02.3(13)C24 and 6-02.3(13)C25 . Each dynamic stiffness test shall be performed three times. Data from individual tests shall be compared to assure consistency of test results.

6-02.3(13)C25 Bearing Fatigue Test

A minimum of three fatigue tests shall be required to establish the durability of each type of bearing. The fatigue test shall be conducted using displacement control. The displacement (strain) range shall be applied using a sine or other smooth waveform at any frequency less than or equal to the service load frequency calculated in Section 6-02.3(13)C24 . The magnitude of the applied displacement amplitude, Δ, shall be calculated as: Δ = Rv / K where Rv = vertical reaction force at the support bearing as obtained from structural analysis K = dynamic stiffness of the support bearing as determined in A minimum precompression strain shall be maintained in the specimen throughout the duration of the test. This precompression strain shall be approximately equal to that present in a support bearing in a field installation. The magnitude of the applied cyclic strain shall be at least equal to the precompression strain. The minimum and maximum dynamic load shall be recorded at the beginning of the test. The minimum and maximum dynamic load shall be monitored and periodically recorded throughout the duration of the test. At the end of each applied displacement cycle, the displacement shall be held at the precompression level for no less than one half of the period of loading in order to facilitate heat dissipation. Artificial air flow devices (electrical fans) may be used to assist heat dissipation. Excessive heat generation will adversely affect the tested fatigue life. A specimen shall be accepted as having passed the fatigue test criteria after withstanding 2 million cycles of loading without failure. M 41-10 Page 6-55 Concrete Structures 6-02The following criteria shall constitute failure:

1.The elastomeric material exhibits excessive deterioration or cracking.
2.The measured minimum dynamic load falls to 30% of the initial dynamic load recorded at test initiation.
3.The measured dynamic load range decreases to half of the initial dynamic load range recorded at test initiation. Data shall be reported in tabular format and shall contain the following information for each specimen tested:
1.Minimum (precompression) strain, maximum strain, displacement, and load at test initiation.
2.Type of loading impulse (sine wave, ramp, or other loading impulse types).
3.Number of cycles at initial observation of distress leading to failure (for reporting purposes only, not to be included in the data).
4.Number of cycles at failure.
5.A description of the mode of failure. The following data shall also be reported for each specimen tested:
1.Bearing type and manufacturer.
2.Drawings depicting shape, size, and dimensions of the specimen including PTFE sliding surfaces or materials bonded to the specimen.
3.Drawings depicting fixture details, including specimen orientation.

6-02.3(13)C26 Fatigue Testing Laboratory

Fatigue testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Facilities known to be capable of performing fatigue testing as specified are identified in

6-02.3(13)C27 Fabrication

The expansion joint systems shall be fabricated consistent with the details, dimensions, material specifications, and procedures delineated in the shop plans. All fabrication procedures shall be in conformance with the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions. All expansion joint systems shall be fabricated by the same manufacturer. Metallic attachments used to secure elastomeric seals to the centerbeams, if welded to the centerbeams and edge beams, shall be welded continuously along both their top and bottom edges. All PTFE shall be bonded under controlled conditions and in strict accordance with written instructions provided by the PTFE manufacturer. All PTFE surfaces shall be smooth and free of bubbles after completion of bonding operations. All stainless steel sliding surfaces in contact with PTFE shall be polished to a Number 8 mirror finish. Each stainless steel sheet shall be welded to the steel backing plate in accordance with current AWS specifications. The stainless steel sheet shall be clamped to provide full contact with the steel backing plate during welding. The welds shall not protrude above the sliding surface of the stainless steel sheet. Page 6-56 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresAll steel surfaces, except those surfaces beneath stainless steel sheet, those to be bonded

to PTFE, or those in direct contact with strip seals, shall be protected against corrosion by one of the following methods:

1.Zinc metallized in accordance with Section 6-07.3(14) .
2.Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111.
3.Painted in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9) . The color of the final coat, when dry, shall match the color chip SAE AMS Standard 595 Color No. 26357. The surfaces embedded in concrete shall be painted only with a shop coat of inorganic zinc silicate paint.

6-02.3(13)C28 Inspection

Each expansion joint system shall be subjected to and shall pass three levels of inspection in order to be accepted. These three levels are Quality Control Inspection, Quality Assurance Inspection, and Final Inspection. The manufacturer shall provide both Quality Control Inspection and Quality Assurance Inspection. The Contractor shall provide access to the Engineer for the Final Inspection. Quality control inspection shall be provided by the manufacturer on a full time basis during the fabrication process of all major components to assure that the materials and Work meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the contract. Quality control inspection shall be performed by an entity having a line of responsibility distinctly different from that of the manufacturer’s fabrication department. Quality assurance inspection shall be performed by an independent inspection agency provided by the manufacturer. Quality assurance inspection is not required to be full time inspection but shall be performed during all phases of the manufacturing process. Final inspection of each expansion joint system will be performed by the Engineer at the job site immediately prior to installation. The Contractor shall provide an accessible work area for this inspection. During final inspection, the Engineer will inspect each expansion joint system for proper alignment, complete bond between expansion joint strip seals and steel components, and proper steel stud placement. There shall be no bends or kinks in the steel components, except as required to follow bridge deck grades and as specifically detailed on the shop plans. Straightening of unintended bends or kinks will not be permitted. All expansion joint systems exhibiting bends or kinks, other than those shown on the shop plans, shall be removed from the job site and replaced with a new expansion joint system at the expense of the Contractor. Expansion joint strip seals not fully bonded to the steel shall be fully bonded at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. Studs will be visually inspected and will be struck lightly with a hammer. Studs that do not have a complete end weld or emit tintinnabulation when struck lightly with a hammer shall be replaced. Studs located more than one inch, in any direction, from the location specified on the shop plans shall be carefully removed and a new stud shall be welded in the proper location. All stud replacements shall be at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency.

6-02.3(13)C29 Acceptance

Each expansion joint system shall pass all three levels of inspection specified in Section

6-02.3(13)C28 to qualify for acceptance. Expansion joint systems which fail any one of the

three levels of inspection shall be replaced or repaired at no expense to the Contracting Agency and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All proposed remedial procedures shall be submitted as Type 2E Working Drawings. M 41-10 Page 6-57 Concrete Structures 6-02The Contractor shall ascertain that the manufacturer has met the fatigue resistance characterization and prequalification requirements of Sections 6-02.3(13)C1 and

6-02.3(13)C2 applicable to the specific expansion joint system being installed. The

Contractor shall be responsible for all additional costs and/or time delays associated with selection of an alternative expansion joint system incurred as a result of noncompliance with these requirements, including the failure of the manufacturer to retest revised details or material substitutions of a previously prequalified system.

6-02.3(13)C30 Shipping and Handling

The expansion joint system shall be delivered to the job site and stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s shop plans. Lifting mechanisms, temperature adjustment devices, and temporary anchorages shall not be welded to the centerbeams or edge beams. Damage to the expansion joint system during shipping or handling shall be just cause for rejection of the expansion joint system. Damage to the corrosion protection system shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

6-02.3(13)C31 Pre-Installation Conference

A pre-installation conference shall be held 5 to 10-working days before the scheduled installation of the modular expansion joint assembly. The purpose of the conference shall be to discuss construction procedures, personnel, equipment to be used, methods to address congestion surrounding the assembly due to bridge deck steel reinforcing bars, expansion joint assembly supports and construction aids, and concrete placement and consolidation operations, including specific placement and consolidation surrounding the assembly support boxes. Those attending shall include, at a minimum, the superintendent, foremen in charge of erecting the joint assembly and placing the concrete encapsulating the assembly, and representatives from the modular expansion joint assembly manufacturer. If the project includes more than one modular expansion joint assembly, and if the Contractor’s key personnel change between installation operations, or at the request of the Engineer, additional conferences shall be held before each modular expansion joint assembly installation.

6-02.3(13)C32 Installation

A qualified installation technician shall be present at the job site to assure proper installation of each expansion joint system. This technician shall be a full time employee of the manufacturer of the specific expansion joint system being installed. The Contractor shall comply with all recommendations made by the expansion joint manufacturer’s installation technician. Each expansion joint system manufacturer’s installation technician shall certify to the Engineer that the manufacturer recommended installation procedures were followed. All certifications to the Engineer shall be in writing and shall be signed and dated by the manufacturer’s installation technician. Each expansion joint system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s shop plans under Section 6-02.3(13)C2 and the recommendations of the manufacturer’s installation technician. All centerbeam welded field splices shall be performed by a certified welder under the direct supervision of the manufacturer’s qualified installation technician as specified above. The weld procedure shall have been submitted by the manufacturer and accepted in accordance with Section 6-02.3(13)C2 . The welder shall have been trained and certified for performing those specific welds in accordance with the current AASHTO/AWS D1.5 Bridge Welding Code. Each permanently installed expansion joint system shall match exactly the finished bridge deck profile and grades. Page 6-58 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe Contractor shall exercise care at all times to protect each expansion joint system from

damage. The Contractor shall protect concrete blockouts and supporting systems from damage and construction traffic prior to installation of the expansion joint systems. After installation, construction loads shall not be allowed on the expansion joint systems. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a proposed method of bridging over each expansion joint system to accommodate construction traffic. Each expansion joint system shall be set to a gap width corresponding to the ambient temperature at the time of setting. This information is specified in the Plans and shall also be specified on the shop plans. All mechanical devices supplied by the joint system manufacturer, for the purpose of setting the expansion joint system to the proper gap width, will remain the property of the manufacturer. When no longer required, the devices shall be returned to the manufacturer. All forms and debris that may impede movement of the expansion joint systems shall be removed. Each expansion joint system shall be tested for watertightness after installation. The Contractor shall flood each completely installed expansion joint system with water to a minimum depth of three inches for a duration of at least one hour. If leakage is observed, the expansion joint system shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense. The repair procedure shall be prepared by the expansion joint system manufacturer and shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. After repairs are completed, the expansion joint shall be retested for leakage.

6-02.3(14) Finishing Concrete Surfaces

All concrete shall show a smooth, dense, uniform surface after the forms are removed. If it is porous, the Contractor shall bear the cost of repairing it. The Contractor shall clean and refinish stained or discolored surfaces. Subsections A and B (below) describe two classes of surface finishing.

6-02.3(14)A Class 1 Surface Finish

The Contractor shall apply a Class 1 finish to all surfaces of concrete members to the limits designated in the Contract Plans. The Contractor shall follow steps 1 through 8 below. When steel forms have been used and when the surface of filled holes matches the texture and color of the area around them, the Contractor may omit steps 3 through 8. To create a Class 1 surface, the Contractor shall:

1.Remove all bolts and all lips and edgings where form members have met;
2.Fill all holes greater than ¼ inch and float to an even, uniform finish with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) at a 1:2 cement/aggregate ratio;
3.Thoroughly wash the surface of the concrete with water;
4.Brush on a mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) at a 1:1 cement/aggregate ratio, working it well into the small air holes and other crevices in the face of the concrete;
5.Brush on no more mortar than can be finished in 1 day;
6.Rub the mortar off with burlap or a piece of carpet as soon as it takes initial set (before it reaches final set);
7.Fog-spray water over the finish as soon as the mortar paint has reached final set; and
8.Keep the surface damp for at least 2 days. If the mortar becomes too hard to rub off as described in step 6, the Contractor shall remove it with a Carborundum stone and water. Random grinding is not permitted. M 41-10 Page 6-59 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(14)B Class 2 Surface Finish The Contractor shall apply a Class 2 finish to all above-ground surfaces not receiving a Class 1 finish as specified above unless otherwise indicated in the Contract. Surfaces covered with fill do not require a surface finish. To produce a Class 2 finish, the Contractor shall remove all bolts and all lips and edgings where form members have met and fill all form tie holes. The Contractor shall remove all lifting embedments to 1 inch below the finished surface and fill the voids in accordance with Section 6-02.3(14)A , items two and three.

6-02.3(14)C Pigmented Sealer for Concrete Surfaces

The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the pigmented sealer manufacturer’s written instructions covering, at a minimum, the following:

1.Surface preparation.
2.Application methods.
3.Requirements for concrete curing prior to sealer application.
4.Temperature, humidity and precipitation limitations for application.
5.Rate of application and number of coats to apply. All surfaces specified in the Plans to receive pigmented sealer shall receive a Class 2 surface finish (except that concrete barrier surfaces shall be finished in accordance with Section 6-02.3(11)A) . The Contractor shall not apply pigmented sealer from a batch greater than 12 months past the initial date of color sample acceptance of that batch by the Engineer. The pigmented sealer color or colors for specific concrete surfaces shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. The final appearance shall be even and uniform without blotchiness, streaking or uneven color. Surface finishes deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be re-coated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. For concrete surfaces such as columns, retaining walls, pier walls, abutments, concrete fascia panels, and noise barrier wall panels, the pigmented sealer shall extend to 1 foot below the finish ground line, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. Pigmented Sealer Materials shall be a product listed in the current WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL). If the pigmented sealer material is not listed in the current WSDOT QPL, a sample shall be submitted to the State Materials Laboratory in Tumwater for evaluation and acceptance in accordance with Section 9-08.3 .

6-02.3(14)D Concrete Surface Finishes Produced by Form Liners

The concrete finishes listed in the table below shall be accomplished by the use of either a form liner selected from the products listed in the WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL), or a form liner accepted by the State Bridge and Structures Architect and the Engineer. For acceptance of form liners not listed in the current WSDOT QPL, the Contractor shall submit Type 3 Working Drawings consisting of catalog cuts, other descriptive supporting information, and a 2-foot square physical sample of the form liner. Page 6-60 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresConcrete FinishHorizontal joints in elastomeric form liners

are permitted on surfaces greater than 8 feet in height1 provided that the minimum form liner panel dimensions are: Height (ft) Width (ft) Fractured Basalt Finish 8 2 Fractured Fin Finish 8 8 Fractured Granite Finish 8 8 Variable Depth Random Board Finish 8 8 3/4 Inch Random Board Finish 8 8 Ribbed Finish 8 8 Striated Finish 8 8 Ashlar Stone Finish 8 8 Block Finish 8 8 Split Face Finish 8 6 River Rock Finish 4 8 Cascadian Stone Finish 4 8 14 feet in height for River Rock Finish and Cascadian Stone Finish Variable Depth Random Board Finish shall utilize an elastomeric form liner. 3/4 Inch Random Board Finish shall utilize either an elastomeric or a plastic form liner. When specified in Contract documents to use wooden form liners, the concrete surface finish shall be achieved with reusable wooden form liners meeting the requirements of this Section and Section 6-02.3(14)D1 . For Cascadian Stone Finish, no partial rocks will be allowed in the finished pattern. The pattern shall be continuous across butt joints. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be adjusted as needed. Form liners shall be placed with the pillars, fins, board lines and faux mortar/other joints normal to grade for barrier applications and vertical for all other applications. Horizontal and vertical joints in ABS, plastic, or elastomeric form liners shall be spliced in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s joint splice instructions. Once the forms are removed, the Contractor shall treat the joint areas by patching or light sandblasting as required by the Engineer to ensure that the joints are not visible. The concrete formed with ABS and plastic form liners shall be given a light sandblast to remove the glossy finish. Form liners shall be cleaned, reconditioned, and repaired before each use. Form liners with repairs, patches, or defects which, in the opinion of the Engineer, would result in adverse effects to the concrete finish shall not be used. Care shall be taken to ensure uniformity of color throughout the textured surface. A change in form release agent will not be allowed. All surfaces formed by the form liner shall also receive a Class 2 surface finish. Form ties shall be a type that leaves a clean hole when removed. All spalls and form tie holes shall be filled as specified for a Class 2 surface finish. M 41-10 Page 6-61 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(14)D1 3/4 Inch Random Board Finish Using Wooden Form Liners The reusable wooden form liners shall conform to Section 6-02.3(17)J and the texture pattern shown in the Plans. The texture pattern shall be accomplished with 3/4 inch thick battens in varying widths applied to the surface of the forms. The edge of all battens shall be sloped 15 degrees to facilitate form removal. The Contractor shall submit a Type 3 Working Drawing consisting of a concrete panel test section, with the 3/4 inch random board texture to be used and based on the pattern shown in the Plans. The test section shall be constructed using the forms and materials intended to construct the permanent structures. The test section shall be composed of two ten foot by ten foot form sections which shall be assembled to make a ten foot by 20 foot concrete surface section, and shall include the wall top treatment, and one horizontal joint treatment. All cracks, holes, slits, gaps, and apertures in forms shall be plugged and caulked with molding plaster to remain completely watertight and withstand the pressures of concrete placement. Joints between the form units shall be sealed with silicone or latex caulking compound. Butt joints may be sealed with non-absorptive sponge tape. Construction joints and expansion joints shall be incorporated into the pattern of the face treatment. Forms and form ties shall be designed to permit removal without damaging the finish. Prying against the face of the concrete will not be allowed. Storage of formwork and form materials shall be in a manner to prevent damage or distortion. All damage to formwork during placing, removal, or storage shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency.

6-02.3(14)E Exposed Aggregate Finish

6-02.3(14)E1 Submittals

The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the following items:

1.Written description of the equipment to be used and procedure to be followed in producing the exposed aggregate finish.
2.A copy of the manufacturer’s written instructions for applying the retardant coating and the clear sealer.
3.Type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, type and gradation of abrasive, blasting techniques, safety procedures, and containment methods and procedures used with all abrasive blasting and water blasting operations.
4.The method and materials used to collect, contain, and dispose of the concrete surface mortar removed from the finish surface, and the chemical agent residue and abrasives used to remove the concrete surface mortar.
5.For formed applications, a sample panel, equal either to the size of one concrete barrier panel minimum for barrier applications, or a four-foot by eight-foot panel for non-barrier applications, cast in a vertical position on the site and constructed in accordance with the procedure outlined in the Type 2 Working Drawing submittal.

6-02.3(14)E2 Producing Exposed Aggregate Finish

The Contractor shall produce all exposed aggregate concrete in accordance with procedure and equipment outlined in the Type 2 Working Drawing submittal. The exposed aggregate shall achieve the same final effect as demonstrated on the sample panel accepted by the Engineer. Formwork shall be cleaned, reconditioned, and repaired before each use. Formwork with repairs, patches or defects which, in the opinion of the Engineer, would result in adverse effects to the concrete finish shall not be used. Page 6-62 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresForms and form joints shall remain completely watertight. Butt joints and joints between

form units used on surfaces which are to receive an exposed aggregate finish shall be tongue and grooved, or splined and shall be sealed with a caulking compound. As an alternative to using tongue and grooved or splined joints, a closed cell polyvinylchloride foam sealer of 3/16 inch thickness with pressure-sensitive adhesive on one or both sides may be used to seal the butt joints between form units. The foam sealer shall be recessed by an amount such that when the form units are compressed to their final position, the foam sealer will be flush with the face of the form units. Adjacent formwork panels, if used, shall be in line and no offset shall occur between panels. Forms for the exposed aggregate surface for members not yet supporting loads, including the members own load, may be removed as required to affect the exposed aggregate surface, provided the concrete has a minimum age of twelve hours and is of sufficient strength and hardness so as not to be damaged by the form removal operations and provided that curing and protection operations are maintained. Removal of forms on the remaining concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with After the forms are stripped, the surface mortar shall be removed from the areas specified to receive the exposed aggregate finish. The exposed aggregate finish shall be obtained by either one or a combination of the two methods described in Sections 6-02.3(14)E3 and 6-02.3(14)E4 as necessary to provide the specified exposed aggregate finish.

6-02.3(14)E3 Retardant Coating Method

A retardant coating conforming to Section 9-08.3(2)A shall be applied to the formwork where concrete surfaces with exposed aggregate finish are shown in the Plans. For cast-in-place concrete the retardant shall have an effective life of not less than the length of time required for the Class EA concrete to be in place prior to the removal of forms plus 12 hours. For slip-formed concrete barrier and horizontal to near-horizontal applications, the retardant shall have an effective life of not less than 24 hours. The Contractor shall remove the surface mortar two to three hours after applying the retardant coating. Retardant shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to remove the surface mortar. The sealer and form release agent used on the form shall be compatible with the retardant and shall not react with the retardant to produce an undesirable effect on the exposed aggregate finish. The sealer and form release agent to be used on the form shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the retardant. Surface mortar shall be removed using one of the following methods:

1.Light abrasive blasting
2.Washing with water under pressure, avoiding excessive pressure which loosens individual aggregate particles.
3.A combination of both methods.

6-02.3(14)E4 Abrasive Blasting Method

As soon as forms are stripped, the exposed aggregate areas shall be abrasive blasted to remove the surface mortar. For slip-formed concrete barrier and horizontal to near- horizontal applications, this shall be done once the concrete has attained a minimum age of 12 hours and is of sufficient strength and hardness to prevent damage. M 41-10 Page 6-63 Concrete Structures 6-02Adjacent materials and finishes shall be protected from dust, dirt and other damage during abrasive blasting operations. Corners and edge of patterns shall be carefully blasted using back-up boards to maintain a uniform corner or edge line. The abrasive blast finishing shall be done in as continuous an operation as possible, utilizing the same work crew to maintain continuity of finish on each surface or area of work. The type and gradation of abrasive grit used, the type of nozzle, nozzle pressure, and blasting techniques shall be as specified in the Type 2 Working Drawing submittal, and as required to expose the aggregate. The Contractor shall be responsible for safety of the workers and shall equip each with air-fed helmets. The Contractor shall provide suitable enclosures for the collection of grit and dust from the abrasive blasting operation. After receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the exposed aggregate finish, a 10 percent muriatic acid wash shall be applied to the exposed aggregate surfaces. Surfaces shall be flushed thoroughly with water following a 5 to 10 minute interaction period between the acid solution and the surface. All stains and streaks on the exposed aggregate surface shall be removed before applying the clear sealer.

6-02.3(14)E5 Applying Clear Sealer

Two seal coatings of clear sealer conforming to Section 9-08.3(2)B shall be applied to the exposed aggregate surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedure.

6-02.3(14)E6 Containment

When producing exposed aggregate finish on concrete surfaces over water, the Contractor shall exercise care and use suitable means to collect and dispose of abrasives and chemical agents, and the resulting concrete surface mortar debris used in or resulting from the finishing of the exposed aggregate surfaces to prevent their entry into the environment surrounding the Structure.

6-02.3(14)F Permeon Treatment

The Contractor shall apply permeon treatment to all concrete surfaces specified in the Plans to receive permeon treatment. The Contractor shall use SAE AMS Standard 595 Color Number 30219 as the target color. The target color is intended as a reference for hue, and is not intended as a reference for opacity or luster. The Contractor is advised that this target color is based on the concentration formula and application rate identified in the QPL for each product. The concentration formula and application rate for products not listed in the QPL will be determined by the Engineer. The permeon treatment shall be applied only by personnel approved by the manufacturer to apply the product. The Contractor shall furnish certificates of approval from the manufacturer, for the personnel scheduled to perform the work, to the Engineer prior to beginning the treatment operation. The concrete shall be cured for the time period recommended by the manufacturer prior to receiving the permeon treatment coating. The Contractor shall clean and prepare the concrete surfaces in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer for the use of the treatment product. The Contractor shall apply the permeon treatment to the surfaces specified, in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer for the use of the treatment product. The Contractor shall prevent permeon treatment from reaching surfaces not specified to receive the permeon treatment. Page 6-64 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe Contractor shall prevent pigmented sealer from reaching surfaces that have received

permeon treatment. Should pigmented sealer reach surfaces that have received permeon treatment, the pigmented sealer shall be removed and the permeon treatment repaired in accordance with Section 1-07.13 .

6-02.3(15) Date Numerals

Standard date numerals shall be placed where shown in the Plans. The date shall be for the year in which the Structure is completed. When an existing Structure is widened or when traffic barrier is placed on an existing Structure, the date shall be for the year in which the original Structure was completed. Unit Contract prices shall cover all costs relating to these numerals.

6-02.3(16) Plans for Falsework and Formwork

The Contractor shall submit all plans for falsework and formwork as Type 2E Working Drawings. A submittal is not required for footing or retaining wall formwork if the concrete placement is 4 feet or less in height. Formwork plans are required for fixed form barriers regardless of height. The design of falsework and formwork shall be based on:

1.Applied loads and conditions which are no less severe than those described in Section

6-02.3(17)A ;

2.Allowable stresses and deflections which are no greater than those described in
3.Special loads and requirements no less severe than those described in
4.Conditions required by other Sections of 6-02.3(17) . The falsework and formwork plans shall be scale drawings showing the details of proposed construction, including: sizes and properties of all members and components; spacing of bents, posts, studs, wales, stringers, wedges and bracing; rates of concrete placement, placement sequence, direction of placement, and location of construction joints; identification of falsework devices and safe working loads as well as identification of all bolts or threaded rods used with the devices including their diameter, length, type, grade, and required torque. The falsework plans shall show the proximity of falsework to utilities or nearby Structures including underground Structures. Formwork accessories shall be identified according to Section 6-02.3(17)H . All assumptions, dimensions, material properties, and other data used in making the structural analysis shall be noted on the drawing. The Contractor shall furnish associated design calculations to the Engineer as part of the submittal. The design calculations shall include the structural and geotechnical design of the foundation and shall show the stresses and deflections in all load-carrying members that are part of the falsework system. Construction details which may be shown in the form of sketches on the calculation sheets shall be shown in the falsework or formwork drawings as well. Falsework or formwork plans will not be accepted in cases where it is necessary to refer to the calculation sheets for information needed for complete understanding of the falsework and formwork plans or how to construct the falsework and formwork.

6-02.3(16)A Vacant

M 41-10 Page 6-65 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(16)B Pre-Contract Review of Falsework and Formwork Plans The Contractor may request pre-contract review of formwork plans for abutments, wingwalls, diaphragms, retaining walls, columns, girders and beams, box Structures, railings, and bulkheads. Plans for falsework supporting the bridge deck for interior spans between precast prestressed concrete girders may also be submitted for pre-contract review. To obtain pre-contract review, the Contractor shall electronically submit drawings and design calculations in PDF format directly to: BridgeConstructionSupport@wsdot.wa.gov The Bridge and Structures Office, Construction Support Engineer will return the falsework or formwork plan to the Contractor with review notes, an effective date of review, and revisions needed prior to use. For each contract on which the pre-reviewed falsework or formwork plans will be used, the Contractor shall submit a copy to the Engineer. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer has given concurrence. If the falsework or formwork being constructed has deviations to the preapproved falsework or formwork plan, the Contractor shall submit plan revisions for review and approval in accordance with Section 6-02.3(16) .

6-02.3(17) Falsework and Formwork

Formwork and falsework are both structural systems. Formwork contains the lateral pressure exerted by concrete placed in the forms. Falsework supports the vertical and/ or the horizontal loads of the formwork, reinforcing steel, concrete, and live loads during construction. The Contractor shall set falsework, to produce in the finished Structure, the lines and grades indicated in the Contract Plans. The setting of falsework shall allow for shrinkage, settlement, falsework girder camber, and all structural camber the Plans or the Engineer require. Concrete forms shall be mortar tight, true to the dimensions, lines, and grades of the Structure. Curved surfaces shown in the Contract Plans shall be constructed as curved surfaces and not chorded, except as allowed in Section 6-02.3(17)J . Concrete formwork shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to prevent overstress and excess deflection as defined in Section 6-02.3(17)B . The rate of depositing concrete in the forms shall not exceed the placement rate in the formwork plan Working Drawing. The interior form shape and dimensions shall also ensure that the finished concrete will conform with the Contract Plans. If the new Structure is near or part of an existing one, the Contractor shall not use the existing Structure to suspend or support falsework unless the Plans or Special Provisions state otherwise. For prestressed girder and T-beam bridge widenings or stage construction, the bridge deck and the diaphragm forms may be supported from the existing Structure or previous stage, if accepted by the Engineer. For steel plate girder bridge widenings or stage construction, only the bridge deck forms may be supported from the existing Structure or previous stage, if accepted by the Engineer. See Section

6-02.3(17)E for additional conditions.

On bridge decks, forms designed to stay in place made of steel or precast concrete panels shall not be used. For post-tensioned Structures, both falsework and forms shall be designed to carry the additional loads caused by the post-tensioning operations. The Contractor shall construct supporting falsework in a way that leaves the Superstructure free to contract and lift off the falsework during post-tensioning. Forms that will remain inside box girders to support the placement of the bridge deck concrete shall, by design, resist girder contraction as little as possible. See Section 6-02.3(26) for additional conditions. Page 6-66 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(17)A Design Loads

The design load for falsework shall consist of the sum of dead and live vertical loads, and a design horizontal load. The minimum total design load for any falsework shall not be less than 100 lbs/sf for combined live and dead load regardless of Structure thickness. The entire Superstructure cross-section, except traffic barrier, shall be considered to be placed at one time for purposes of determining support requirements and designing falsework girders for their stresses and deflections, except as follows: For concrete box girder bridges, the girder stem, diaphragms, crossbeam and connected bottom slabs may be considered self-supporting between the falsework bents at the time the top slab is place provided the following conditions are true:

1.Five or more days have elapsed since the stem walls were placed.
2.The distance between the falsework bents is less than or equal to four times the depth of the girder that has been placed in the preceding concrete placements. Falsework bents shall be designed for the entire live load and dead load, including all load transfer that takes place during post-tensioning, and braced for the design horizontal load. Dead loads shall include the weight of all successive placements of concrete, reinforcing steel, forms and falsework, and all load transfer that takes place during post-tensioning. The weight of concrete with reinforcing steel shall be assumed to be not less than 160 pounds per cubic foot. Live loads shall consist of a minimum uniform load of not less than 25 psf, applied over the entire falsework plan area, plus the greater of:
1.Actual weights of the deck finishing equipment applied at the rails, or;
2.A minimum load of 75 pounds per linear foot applied at the edge of the bridge deck. The design horizontal load to be resisted by the falsework bracing system in any direction shall be: The sum of all identifiable horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence, side-sway caused by geometry or eccentric loading conditions, or other causes, and an allowance for wind plus an additional allowance of 1 percent of the total dead load to provide for unexpected forces. In no case shall the design horizontal load be less than 3 percent of the total dead load. The minimum horizontal load to be allowed for wind on each heavy-duty steel shoring tower having a vertical load carrying capacity exceeding 30 kips per leg shall be the sum of the products of the wind impact area, shape factor, and the applicable wind pressure value for each height zone. The wind impact area is the total projected area of all the elements in the tower face normal to the applied wind. The shape factor for heavy-duty steel shoring towers shall be taken as 2.2. Wind pressure values shall be determined from the following table: Wind Pressure on Heavy-Duty Steel Shoring Towers Height Zone (Feet Above Ground)Wind Pressure Value Adjacent to Traffic At Other Locations 0 to 30 20 psf 15 psf 30 to 50 25 psf 20 psf 50 to 100 30 psf 25 psf Over 100 35 psf 30 psf The minimum horizontal load to be allowed for wind on all other types of falsework, including falsework girders and forms supported on heavy-duty steel shoring towers, shall be the sum of the products of the wind impact area and the applicable wind M 41-10 Page 6-67 Concrete Structures 6-02pressure value for each height zone. The wind impact area is the gross projected area of the falsework support system, falsework girders, forms and any unrestrained portion of the permanent Structure, excluding the areas between falsework posts or towers where diagonal bracing is not used. Wind pressure values shall be determined from the following table: Wind Pressure on All Other Types of Falsework Height Zone (Feet Above Ground)Wind Pressure Value For Members Over and Bents Adjacent to Traffic Openings At Other Locations 0 to 30 2.0 Q psf 1.5 Q psf 30 to 50 2.5 Q psf 2.0 Q psf 50 to 100 3.0 Q psf 2.5 Q psf Over 100 3.5 Q psf 3.0 Q psf The value of Q in the above tabulation shall be determined as follows: Q = 1 + 0.2W; but Q shall not be more than 10. Where: W = is the width of the falsework system, in feet, measured normal to the direction of the wind force being considered. The falsework system shall also be designed so that it will be sufficiently stable to resist overturning prior to the placement of the concrete. The minimum factor of safety against falsework overturning in all directions from the assumed horizontal load for all stages of construction shall be 1.25. If the required resisting moment is less than 1.25 times the overturning moment, the difference shall be resisted by bracing, cable guys, or other means of external support. Design of falsework shall include the vertical component (whether positive or negative) of bracing loads imposed by the design horizontal load. Design of falsework shall investigate the effects of any horizontal displacement due to stretch of the bracing. This is particularly important when using cable or rod bracing systems. If the concrete is to be post-tensioned, the falsework shall be designed to support all increased or redistributed loads caused by the prestressing forces.

6-02.3(17)B Allowable Design Stresses and Deflections

The maximum allowable stresses listed in this section are based on the use of identifiable, undamaged, high-quality materials. Stresses shall be appropriately reduced if lesser quality materials are to be used. These maximum allowable stresses include all adjustment factors, such as the short-term load duration factor. The maximum allowable stresses and deflections used in the design of the falsework and formwork shall be as follows:

6-02.3(17)B1 Deflection

Deflection resulting from dead load and concrete pressure for exposed visible surfaces shall not exceed 1/360 of the span. Deflection resulting from dead load and concrete pressure for unexposed non-visible surfaces, including the bottom of the deck slab between girders shall not exceed 1/270 of the span. In the foregoing, the span length shall be the center line to center line distance between supports for simple and continuous spans, and from the center line of support to the Page 6-68 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresend of the member for cantilever spans. For plywood supported on members wider than

1½ inches, the span length shall be taken as the clear span plus 1½ inches. Also, dead load shall include the weight of all successive placements of concrete, reinforcing steel, forms and falsework self weight. Only the self weight of falsework girders may be excluded from the calculation of the above deflections provided that the falsework girder deflection is compensated for by the installation of camber strips. Where successive placements of concrete are to act compositely in the completed Structure, deflection control becomes extremely critical. Maximum deflection of supporting members shall not exceed 1/500 of the span for members constructed in several successive placements (such as concrete box girder and concrete T-beam girder Structures). Falsework components shall be sized, positioned, and/or supported to minimize progressive increases in deflection of the Structure which would preload the concrete or reinforcing steel before it becomes fully composite.

6-02.3(17)B2 Timber

Each species and grade of timber/lumber used in constructing falsework and formwork shall be identified in the drawings. The allowable stresses and loads shall not exceed the lesser of stresses and loads given in the table below or factored stresses for designated species and grade in Table 7.3 of the Timber Construction Manual, latest edition, by the American Institute of Timber Construction. Compression perpendicular to the grain reduced to 300 psi for use when moisture content is 19 percent or more (areas exposed to rain, concrete curing water, green lumber).450 psi Compression parallel to the grain but not to exceed 1,500 psi.480,000 psi (L/d)2 Flexural stress for members with a nominal depth greater than 8 inches.1,800 psi Flexural stress psi for members with a nominal depth of 8 inches or less.1,500 psi The maximum horizontal shear. 140 psi AXIAL tension. 1,200 psi The maximum modulus of elasticity (E) for timber. 1,600,000 psi Where: L is the unsupported length; and d is the least dimension of a square or rectangular column, or the width of a square of equivalent cross-sectional area for round columns. The allowable stress for compression perpendicular to the grain, and for horizontal shear shall not be increased by any factors such as short duration loading. Additional requirements are found in other parts of Section 6-02.3(17) . Criteria for the design of lumber and timber connections are found in Section 6-02.3(17)I. Plywood for formwork shall be designed in accordance with the methods and stresses allowed in the APA Design/Construction Guide for Concrete Forming as published by the American Plywood Association, Tacoma, Washington. As concrete forming is a special application for plywood, wet stresses shall be used and then adjusted for forming conditions such as duration of load, and experience factors. Concrete pour pressures shall be in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)J . M 41-10 Page 6-69 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(17)B3 S teel For identified grades of steel, design stresses shall not exceed those specified in the Steel Construction Manual, latest edition, by the American Institute of Steel Construction, except as follows: Compression, flexural but not to exceed 0.6Fy 12,000,000 psi Ld/bt The modulus of elasticity (E) shall be 29,000,000 psi When the grade of steel cannot be positively identified as with salvaged steel and if rivets are present, design stresses shall not exceed the following: Yield point fy30,000 psi Tension, axial, and flexural 16,000 psi Compression, axial except L/r shall not exceed 120 14,150 - 0.37(KL/r)2 psi Shear on gross section of the web of rolled shapes 9,500 psi Web crippling for rolled shapes 22,500 psi Compression, flexural but not to exceed 16,000 psi and L/b not greater than 3916,000 - 5.2(L/b)2 psi The modulus of elasticity (E) shall be 29,000,000 psi Where: L is the unsupported length; d is the least dimension o f rectangular columns, or the width of a square of equivalent cross-sectional area for round columns, or the depth of beams; b is the flang e width; t is the thickness o f the compression flange; r is the r adius of gyration of the compression flange about the weak axis of the member; and Fy is the specified minimum yield stress, psi, for the grade of steel used. All dimensions are expressed in inches.

6-02.3(17)C Falsework and Formwork at Special Locations

In addition to the minimum requirements specified in Sections 6-02.3(17)A and

6-02.3(17) B, falsework towers or posts supporting beams directly over Roadways or

railroads which are open to traffic or the public shall be designed and constructed so that the falsework will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. The use of damaged materials, unidentifiable material, salvaged steel or steel with burned holes or questionable weldments shall not be used for falsework described in this section. For the purposes of this Specification the following public or private facilities shall also be considered as “Roadways”: pedestrian pathways and other Structures such as bridges, walls, and buildings. The dimensions of the clear openings to be provided through the falsework for Roadways, railroads, or pedestrian pathways shall be as specified in the Contract. Falsework posts or shoring tower systems which support members that cross over a Roadway or railroad shall be considered as adjacent to Roadways or railroads. Other falsework posts or shoring towers shall be considered as adjacent to Roadways or railroads only if the following conditions apply: 1.L ocated in the row of falsework posts or shoring towers nearest to the Roadway or railroad; and Page 6-70 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures2. Horizontal distance from the traffic side of the falsework to the edge of pavement

is less than the total height of the falsework and forms; or

3.The total height of the falsework and forms is greater than the horizontal clear distance between the base of the falsework and a point 10 feet from the centerline of track. The Contractor shall provide any additional features for the Work needed to ensure that the falsework will be stable for impact by vehicles; providing adequate safeguards, safety devices, protective equipment, and any other needed actions to protect property and the life, health, and safety of the public; and shall comply with the provisions in Sections

1-07.23 and 6-02.3(17)M . The falsework design at special locations, shall incorporate

the minimum requirements detailed in this section, even if protected by concrete median barrier. The vertical load used for the design of falsework posts and towers which support the portion of the falsework over openings, shall be the greater of the following:

1.150 percent of the design load calculated in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)B , but not including increased or redistributed loads caused by the post-tensioning forces; or
2.100 percent of the design load plus the increased or redistributed loads caused by the post-tensioning forces. Each falsework post or each shoring tower leg adjacent to Roadways or railroads shall consist of either steel with a minimum section modulus about each axis of 9.5 inches cubed or sound timbers with a minimum section modulus about each axis of 250 inches cubed. Each falsework post or shoring tower leg adjacent to Roadways or railroads shall be mechanically connected to its supporting footing at its base, or otherwise laterally restrained, to withstand a force of not less than 2,000 pounds applied at the base of the post or tower leg in any direction except toward the Roadway or railroad track. Posts or tower legs shall be connected to the falsework cap and stringer by mechanical connections capable of resisting a load in any horizontal direction of not less than 1,000 pounds. For falsework spans over Roadways and railroads, all falsework stringers shall be mechanically connected to the falsework cap or framing. The mechanical connections shall be capable of resisting a load in any direction, including uplift on the stringer, of not less than 500 pounds. All associated connections shall be installed before traffic is allowed to pass beneath the span. When timber members are used to brace falsework bents which are located adjacent to Roadways or railroads, all connections shall be bolted through the members using ⅝-inch diameter or larger bolts. Concrete traffic barrier shall be used to protect all falsework adjacent to traveled Roadways. The falsework shall be located so that falsework footings, mudsills, or piles are at least 2 feet clear of the traffic barrier and all other falsework members shall also be at least 2 feet clear of the traffic barrier. Traffic barrier used to protect falsework shall not be fastened, guyed, or blocked to falsework but shall be fastened to the pavement according to details shown in the Plans. The installation of concrete traffic barrier shall be completed before falsework erection is begun. The traffic barrier at the falsework shall not be removed until allowed by the Engineer. Falsework openings which are provided for the Contractor’s own use (not for public use) shall also use concrete traffic barrier to protect the falsework, except the minimum clear distance between the barrier and falsework footings, mudsills, piles, or other falsework members shall be at least 3 inches. M 41-10 Page 6-71 Concrete Structures 6-02Falsework bents within 20 feet of the center line of a railroad track shall be braced to resist the required horizontal load or 2,000 pounds whichever is greater. Pedestrian openings through falsework shall be paved or surfaced with full width continuous wood walks which shall be wheelchair accessible and shall be kept clear. Pedestrians shall be protected from falling objects and water falling from construction above. Overhead protection for pedestrians shall extend at least 4 feet beyond the edge of the bridge deck. Plans and details of the overhead protection and pathway shall be submitted with the falsework Working Drawings. Pedestrian openings through falsework shall be illuminated by temporary lighting, constructed and maintained by the Contractor. The temporary lighting shall be constructed in accordance with local electrical code requirements. The temporary lighting shall be steady burning 60-watt, 120-volt lamps with molded waterproof lamp holders spaced at 25-foot centers maximum. All costs relating to pedestrian pathway paving, wood walks, overhead protection, maintenance, operating costs, and temporary pedestrian lighting shall be incidental to applicable adjacent items of Work.

6-02.3(17)D Falsework Support Systems: Foundations, Manufactured Shoring Towers,

Caps, and Posts Foundations for falsework shall be designed for conditions stated in this Section using methods shown in the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges Seventeenth Edition – 2002 for allowable stress design, the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications for load and resistance factor design or the AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge Temporary Works . Allowable stresses for materials shall not exceed stresses and conditions allowed by Section 6-02.3(17)B .

6-02.3(17)D1 Vacant

6-02.3(17)D2 Vacant

6-02.3(17)D3 Bents, Shoring Towers, Piling, Posts, and Caps

Plans for falsework bents or shoring tower systems, including manufactured tower systems shall have plan, cross-section, and elevation view scale drawings showing all geometry. Show in the falsework plans the proximity of falsework to utilities and all other nearby Structures including underground Structures. The ground elevation, cross-slopes, relation of stringers to one another, and dimensions to posts or piling shall be shown in the falsework plans. Column, pile, or tower heights shall be indicated. Member sizes, wall thickness and diameter of steel pipe columns or piles shall be shown in the falsework plans. Location of wedges, minimum bearing area and type of wedge material shall be identified in the falsework plans. Bracing size, location, material and all connections shall be described in the falsework plans. The relationship of the falsework bents or shoring tower systems to the permanent Structure’s pier and footing shall be shown. Load paths shall be as direct as possible. Loads shall be applied through the shear centers of all members to avoid torsion and buckling conditions. Where loads cause twisting, biaxial bending, or axial loading with bending, the affected members shall be designed for combined stresses and stability. Posts or columns shall be constructed plumb with tops and bottoms carefully cut to provide full end bearing. Caps shall be installed at all bents supported by posts or piling unless the falsework Working Drawings specifically permit otherwise. Caps shall be fastened to the piling or posts. The falsework shall be capable of supporting non uniform or localized loading without adverse effect. For example, the loading of cantilevered ends of stringers or caps shall not cause a condition of instability in the adjacent unloaded members. Page 6-72 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresTimber posts and piling shall be fastened to the caps and mudsills by through-bolted

connections, drift pins, or other accepted connections. The minimum diameter of round timber posts shall be shown in the falsework plans. Timber caps and timber mudsills shall be checked for crushing from columns or piling under maximum load. Steel posts and piling shall be welded or bolted to the caps and shall be bolted or welded to the foundation. Steel members shall be checked for buckling, web yielding, and web crippling. Wedges shall be used to permit formwork to be taken up and released uniformly. Wedges shall be oak or close-grained Douglas fir. Cedar wedges or shims shall not be used anywhere in a falsework or forming system. Wedges shall be used at the top or bottom of shores, but not at both top and bottom. After the final adjustment of the shore elevation is complete, the wedges shall be fastened securely to the sill or cap beam. Only one set of wedges (with one optional block) shall be used at one location. Screw jacks (or other allowed devices) shall be used under arches to allow incremental release of the falsework. Sand jacks may be used to support falsework and are used for falsework lowering only. Sand jacks shall be constructed of steel with snug fitting steel or concrete pistons. Sand jacks shall be filled with dry sand and the jack protected from moisture throughout its use. They shall be designed and installed in such a way to prevent the unintentional migration or loss of sand. All sand jacks shall be tested in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)G . When falsework is over or adjacent to Roadways or railroads, all details of the falsework system which contribute to the horizontal stability and resistance to impact shall be installed at the time each element of the falsework is erected and shall remain in place until the falsework is removed. For other requirements see Section 6-02.3(17)C . Transverse construction joints in the Superstructure shall be supported by falsework at the joint location. The falsework shall be constructed in such a manner that subsequent pours will not produce additional stresses in the concrete already in place.

6-02.3(17)D4 Manufactured Shoring Tower Systems and Devices

Manufactured proprietary shoring tower systems shall be identified in the falsework plans by make and model and safe working load capacity per leg. The safe working load for shoring tower systems shall be based upon a minimum 2½ to 1 factor of safety. The safe working load capacity, anticipated deflection (or settlement), make and model shall be identified in the falsework plans for manufactured devices such as: single shores, overhang brackets, support bracket and jack assemblies, friction collars and clamps, hangers, saddles, and sand jacks. The safe working load for shop manufactured devices shall be based on a minimum ultimate strength safety factor of 2 to 1. The safe working load for field fabricated devices and all single shores shall be based on a minimum ultimate strength safety factor of 3 to 1. The safe working load of all devices shall not be exceeded. The design loads shall be as defined by Section 6-02.3(17)A . The maximum allowable free end deflection of deck overhang brackets under working loads applied shall not exceed 3/16 inch measured at the edge of the concrete slab regardless of the fact that the deflection may be compensated for by pre-cambering or of setting the elevations high. The Contractor shall comply with all manufacturer’s specifications; including those relating to bolt torque, placing washers under nuts and bolt heads, cleaning and oiling of parts, and the reuse of material. Devices which are deteriorated, bent, warped, or have poorly fitted connections or welds, shall not be installed. Shoring tower or device capacity as shown in catalogs or brochures published by the manufacturer shall be considered as the maximum load which the shoring is able to safely support under ideal conditions. These maximum values shall be reduced for adverse loading conditions; such as horizontal loads, eccentricity due to unbalanced spans or placing sequence, and uneven foundation settlement. M 41-10 Page 6-73 Concrete Structures 6-02Copies of catalog data and/or other technical data shall be furnished with the falsework plans to verify the load-carrying capacity, deflection, and manufacturers installation requirements of all manufactured products or devices proposed for use. Upon request by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish manufacturer certified test reports and results showing load capacity, deflection, test installation conditions, and identify associated components and hardware for shoring tower systems or other devices. In addition to manufacturer’s requirements, the criteria shown in the following sections for manufactured proprietary shoring tower systems and devices shall be complied with when preparing falsework plans, calculations, and installing these shoring tower systems and devices as falsework. Alternative criteria and/or systems shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a written statement on the manufacturer’s letterhead, signed by the shoring or device manufacturer (not signed by a material supplier or the Contractor) addressing the following:

1.Identity of the specific Contract on which the alternative criteria and/or system will apply;
2.Description of the alternative criteria and/or system;
3.Technical data and test reports;
4.The conditions under which the particular alternative criteria may be followed; and
5.That a design based on the alternative criteria will not overstress or over deflect shoring components or devices nor reduce the required safety factor. In any case where the falsework drawings detail a manufactured product and the manufacturer’s safe working load, load versus deflection curves, factor of safety, and installation requirements cannot be found in any catalog, the Engineer may require load testing in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)G to verify the safe working load and deflection characteristics. Tower leg loads shall not exceed the limiting values under any loading condition or sequence. All frame extensions and reduced capacity shall be shown in the falsework plans. Screw jacks shall fit tight in the leg assemblies without wobble. Screw jacks shall be plumb and straight. Shoring towers shall be installed plumb, and load distribution beams shall be arranged such that vertical loads are distributed to all legs for all successive concrete placements. There shall be no eccentric loads on shoring tower heads unless the heads have been designed for such loading. Shoring towers shall remain square or rectangular in plan view and shall not be skewed. There shall be no interchanging of parts from one manufactured shoring system to another. Bent or faulty components shall not be used. For manufactured shoring towers that allow ganging of frames, the number of ganged frames shall be limited to one frame per opposing side of a tower, and the total number of legs per ganged tower shall not exceed eight legs. Ganged frames shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published standards using the manufacturer’s components. Other gang arrangements shall not be used. For manufactured steel shoring tower systems, the Contractor shall have bracing designed and installed for horizontal loads and falsework overturning in accordance with Section

6-02.3(17)A Minimum bracing criteria and allowable leg loads are described in the

following paragraphs. All shoring tower systems and bracing shall be thoroughly inspected by the Contractor for plumb vertical support members, secure connections, and straight bracing members immediately prior to, at intervals during, and immediately after every concrete placement. For manufactured shoring tower systems, the maximum allowable deviation from the vertical is ⅛ inch in 3 feet. If this tolerance is exceeded, concrete shall not be placed until adjustments have brought the shoring towers within the acceptable tolerance. Page 6-74 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(17)E Stringers, Beams, Joists, Bridge Deck Support, and Deck Overhangs

All stringers, beams, joists, and bridge deck support shall be designed for the design loads, deflections, and allowable stresses described in the preceding Section 6-02.3(17)A , B, and C and for the following conditions. At points of support, stringers, beams, joists, and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about their longitudinal axis. The effect of biaxial bending shall be investigated in all cases where falsework beams are not set plumb and the Structure cross-slope exceeds 3 percent. For box girder and T-beam bridges, the centerline of falsework beams or stringers shall be located within 2 feet of the bridge girder stems and preferably directly under the stems or webs. Stringers supporting formwork for concrete box girder and T-beam slab overhangs shall be stiff enough so that the differential deflection due to the placement of bridge deck concrete is no more than 3/16 inch between the outside edge of the bridge deck and the exterior web even if camber strips can compensate for the deflection. Friction shall not be relied upon for lateral stability of beams or stringers. If the compression flange of a beam is not laterally restrained, the allowable bending stress shall be reduced to prevent flange buckling. If flange restraint is provided and since it is impossible to predict the direction in which a compression flange will buckle, positive restraint shall be provided in both directions. Flange restraint shall be designed for a minimum load of 2 percent of the calculated compression force in the beam flange at the point under consideration. Camber strips shall be used to compensate for falsework take-up and deflection, vertical alignment, and the anticipated Structure dead load deflection shown in the camber diagram in the Contract Plans. Camber is the adjustment to the profile of a load- supporting beam or stringer so that the completed Structure will have the lines and grades shown in the Plans. The dead load camber diagram shown in the Contract Plans is the predicted Structure dead load deflection due to weight of applied concrete loads. This dead load camber shall be increased by:

1.Amount of anticipated falsework take up,
2.Anticipated deflection of the falsework beam or stringer under the actual load imposed, and
3.Vertical curve compensation, if any. Camber strips shall be fastened by nailing to the top of wood members, or by clamping or banding in the case of steel members. Camber strips shall have sufficient contact bearing area to prevent crushing under total load. Camber strips are required when the total camber adjustment exceeds ¼ inch for exterior falsework stringers and ½ inch for interior stringers. On concrete box girder Structures, the forms supporting the bridge deck shall rest on ledgers or similar supports and shall not be supported from the bottom slab except as provided below. The form supports shall be fastened within 18 inches of the top of the web walls, producing a clear span between web walls. The bridge deck forms may be supported or posted from the bottom slab if the following conditions are met:
1.Permanent access, shown in the Contract Plans, is provided to the cells, and the centerline to centerline distance between web walls is greater than 10 feet;
2.Falsework stringers designed for total load, stresses and deflections in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)A and B are located directly below each row of posts;
3.Posts have adequate lateral restraint; and
4.All forms (including the bridge deck forms), posts, and bracing are completely removed. M 41-10 Page 6-75 Concrete Structures 6-02The falsework and forms on concrete box girder Structures supporting a sloping web and deck overhang shall consist of a lateral support system which is designed to resist all rotational forces acting on the stem, including those caused by the placement of bridge deck concrete, bridge deck formwork mass, finishing machine, and other live loads. Stem reinforcing steel shall not be stressed by the construction of the bridge deck slab placement. Overhang brackets shall not be used for the support of bridge deck forms from sloping web concrete box girder bridges. Deck slab forms between girders or webs shall be constructed such that there is no differential settlement relative to the girders. The support systems for form panels supporting concrete deck slabs and overhangs on girder bridges (such as steel plate girders and prestressed girders) shall be designed as falsework. Falsework supporting deck slabs and overhangs on girder bridges shall be supported directly by the girders so that there will be no differential settlement between the girders and the deck forms during placement of deck concrete.

6-02.3(17)F Bracing

All falsework bracing systems shall be designed to resist the horizontal design load in all directions with the falsework in either the loaded or unloaded condition. All bracing, connection details, specific locations of connections, and hardware used shall be shown in the falsework plans. Falsework diagonal bracing shall be thoroughly analyzed with particular attention given to the connections. The allowable stresses in the diagonal braces may be controlled by the joint strength or the compression stability of the diagonal. Timber bracing for timber falsework bents shall have connections designed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)I . All damaged cross-bracing, such as split timber members shall be replaced. Steel strapping shall avoid making sharp angles or right-angle bends. A means of preventing accidental loss of tension shall be provided for steel strapping. See Sections

6-02.3(17)A , B, and C for design loads and allowable stresses.

Bracing shall not be attached to concrete traffic barrier, guardrail posts, or guardrail. To prevent falsework beam or stringer compression flange buckling, cross-bracing members and connections shall be designed to carry tension as well as compression. All components, connection details and specific locations shall be shown in the falsework plans. Bracing, blocking, struts, and ties required for positive lateral restraint of beam flanges shall be installed at right angles to the beam in plan view. If possible, bracing in adjacent bays shall be set in the same transverse plane. However, if because of skew or other considerations, it is necessary to offset the bracing in adjacent bays, the offset distance shall not exceed twice the depth of the beam. All falsework and bracing shall be inspected by the Contractor for plumbness of vertical support members, secure connections, tight cables, and straight bracing members immediately prior to, during, and immediately after every concrete placement. Bracing shall be provided to withstand all imposed loads during erection of the falsework and all phases of construction for falsework adjacent to a Roadway, sidewalk, or railroad track which is open to the public. All details of the falsework system which contribute to horizontal stability and resistance to impact, including the bolts in bracing, shall be installed at the time each element of the falsework is erected and shall remain in place until the falsework is removed. The falsework plans shall show provisions for supplemental bracing or methods to be used to conform to this requirement during each phase of erection and removal. Wind loads shall be included in the design of such bracing or methods. Loads, connections, and materials for falsework adjacent to Roadways, shall also be in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)C . Page 6-76 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(17)F1 Cable or Tension Bracing Systems

When cables, wire rope, steel rod, or other types of tension bracing members are used as external bracing to resist horizontal forces, or as temporary bracing to support bents while falsework is being erected or removed adjacent to traffic, all elements of the bracing system shall be shown in the falsework plans. Bracing shall not be attached to concrete traffic barrier, guardrail posts, or guardrail. All damaged bracing, such as frayed and kinked guying systems shall be replaced. Wire rope shall avoid making sharp angles or right- angle bends and a means of preventing accidental loss of tension shall be provided. The following information shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing:

1.Cable diameter, rod, or tension member size, and allowable working load.
2.Location and method of attaching the cable, rod, or tension member to the falsework. The connecting device shall be designed to transfer both horizontal and vertical forces to the cable without overstressing the falsework component.
3.The type of cable connectors or fastening devices (such as wire rope clips, plate clamps, or other attachment devices) to be used and the efficiency factor for each type. If cables are to be spliced, the splicing method shall be shown.
4.Method of tightening cables, rods, or tension members after installation if tightening is necessary to ensure their effectiveness. Method of preventing accidental loosening.
5.Anchorage details, including the size and mass of concrete anchor blocks, the assumed coefficient of friction for surface anchorages, and the assumed lateral soil bearing capacity for buried anchorages.
6.Method of pre-stretching or preloading cable or tension members.
7.Determination of the potential stretch or elongation of the tension member under the design load and if the resulting lateral deflection will cause excessive secondary stresses in the falsework. Copies of manufacturer’s catalog or brochure showing technical data pertaining to the type of cable to be used shall be furnished with the falsework plans. Technical data shall include the cable diameter, the number of strands and the number of wires per strand, ultimate breaking strength or recommended safe working strength, and any other information as may be needed to identify the cable. In the absence of sufficient technical data to identify the cable, or if it is old and obviously worn, the Contractor shall perform cable breaking tests to establish the safe working load for each reel of cable furnished. For static guy cable the minimum factor of safety shall be 3 to 1. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer an opportunity to witness these tests. When cable bracing is used to prevent the overturning of heavy-duty shoring, attention shall be given to the connections by which forces are transferred from the shoring to the cables. Cable restraint shall be designed to act through the cap system to prevent the inadvertent application of forces which the shoring is not designed to withstand. Cables shall not be attached to tower components. Cable splices made by lapping and clipping with wire rope clip type clamps shall not be used. Other splicing methods may be used; however, at each location where the cable is spliced, cable strength shall be verified by a load test. When cables are used as external bracing to resist overturning of a falsework system, the horizontal load to be carried by the cables shall be calculated as follows:
1.When used with heavy-duty shoring systems, cables shall be designed to resist the difference between 1.25 times the total overturning moment and the resistance to overturning provided by the individual falsework towers. M 41-10 Page 6-77 Concrete Structures 6-022. When used with pipe-frame shoring systems where supplemental bracing is required, cables shall be designed to resist the difference between 1.25 times the total overturning moment and the resistance to overturning provided by the shoring system as a whole.
3.When used as external bracing to prevent overturning of all other types of falsework, including temporary support during erection and removal of falsework at traffic openings, cables shall be designed to resist 1.25 times the total overturning moment. The maximum allowable cable design load shall be determined using the following criteria:
1.If the cable is new, or is in uniformly good condition, and if it can be identified by reference to a manufacturer’s catalog or other technical publication, the allowable load shall be the ultimate strength of the cable as specified by the manufacturer, multiplied by the efficiency of the cable connector, and divided by a safety factor of 3 (i.e., safe working load = breaking strength × connector efficiency/safety factor).
2.If the cable is used but still in serviceable condition, or is new or nearly new but cannot be found in a manufacturer’s catalog, the Contractor shall perform load breaking tests. In this case, the cable design load shall not exceed the breaking strength, as determined by the load test, multiplied by the connector efficiency factor, and divided by a safety factor of 3.
3.If the cable is used and still in serviceable condition, or is a new or nearly new cable which cannot be identified, and if load breaking tests are not performed, the cable design load shall not exceed the safe working load shown in the wire rope capacities table multiplied by the cable connector efficiency. Cable connectors shall be designed in accordance with criteria shown in the following tables “Efficiency of Wire Rope Connections” and “Applying Wire Rope Clips”. Cable safe working loads are provided in table “Wire Rope Capacities”. Efficiency of Wire Rope Connections (As compared to Safe Loads on Wire Rope) Type of Connection Connector Efficiency Wire Rope 100% Sockets – Zink Type 100% Wedge Sockets 70% Wire Rope Clips – With Thimble 80% Knot and Clip (Contractors Knot) 50% Plate Clamp – 3 Bolt Type With Thimble 80% Spliced Eye and Thimble: ¼″ and smaller 100% ⅜″ to ¾″ 95% ⅞″ to 1″ 88% 1⅛″ to 1½″ 82% 1⅝″ to 2″ 75% 2⅛″ and larger 70% Page 6-78 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresWire Rope Capacities

Safe Load in Pounds for New Plow Steel Hoisting Rope 6 Strands of 19-Wires, Hemp Center (Safety Factor of 6) Diameter inches Weight Lbs./Ft. Safe Load Lbs. ¼ 0.10 1,050 5/16 0.16 1,500 ⅜ 0.23 2,250 7/16 0.31 3,070 ½ 0.40 4,030 9/16 0.51 4,840 ⅝ 0.63 6,330 ¾ 0.95 7,930 ⅞ 1.29 10,730 1 1.60 15,000 1⅛ 2.03 18,600 1¼ 2.50 23,000 1⅜ 3.03 25,900 1½ 3.60 30,700 1⅝ 4.23 35,700 1¾ 4.90 41,300

6-02.3(17)F2 Applying Wire Rope Clips

The only correct method of attaching U-bolt wire rope clips to rope ends is to place the base (saddle) of the clip against the live end of the rope, while the “U” of the bolt presses against the dead end. The clips are usually spaced about six rope diameters apart to give adequate holding power. A wire-rope thimble shall be used in the loop eye to prevent kinking when wire rope clips are used. The correct number of clips for safe application, and spacing distances, are shown below: Number of Clips and Spacing for Safe Application Improved Plow Steel Rope Diameter inchesNumber of Clips Minimum Drop Forged Other Material Spacing (Inches) ⅜ 2 3 3 ½ 3 4 3½ ⅝ 3 4 4 ¾ 4 5 4½ ⅞ 4 5 5¼ 1 5 6 6 1⅛ 6 6 6¾ 1¼ 6 7 7½ 1⅜ 7 7 8¼ 1½ 7 8 9 M 41-10 Page 6-79 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(17)F3 Anchor Blocks Concrete anchor blocks and connections used to resist forces from external bracing shall be shown in the falsework plans. Concrete anchor blocks shall be proportioned to resist both sliding and overturning. When designing anchor block stability, the weight of the anchor block shall be reduced by the vertical component of the cable or brace tension to obtain the net or effective mass to be used in the anchorage computations. The coefficient of friction assumed in the design shall not exceed the following: Friction Coefficient Anchor block set on sand 0.40 Anchor block set on clay 0.50 Anchor block set on gravel 0.60 Anchor block set on pavement 0.60 Multiply the friction coefficient by 0.67 if it is likely the supporting material is wet or will become wet during the construction period. The method of connecting the cable or brace to the anchor block is part of the anchor block design. The connection shall be designed to resist both horizontal and vertical forces.

6-02.3(17)F4 Temporary Bracing for Bridge Girders During Erection

Steel girders shall be braced in accordance with Section 6-03.3(7)A . Prestressed concrete girders shall be braced sequentially during girder erection. The bracing shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and shall be shown in the falsework/formwork Working Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and remove the bracing at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. At a minimum, the Contractor shall brace girders at each end and at midspan to prevent lateral movement or rotation. This bracing shall be placed prior to the release of each girder from the erection equipment. If the bridge is constructed with cast-in-place concrete diaphragms, the bracing may be removed once the concrete in the diaphragms has been placed and cured for a minimum of 24 hours.

6-02.3(17)F5 Temporary Bracing for Bridge Girders During Diaphragm and Bridge Deck

Concrete Placement Girders shall be braced to resist all temporary and construction loads, including those caused by the placing of precast concrete deck panels and concrete for the bridge deck. At a minimum, the Contractor shall brace concrete girders to prevent relative lateral movement and rotation at a spacing not to exceed 60 feet. The Contractor may consider the bracing effects of the diaphragms. The Contractor shall account for the added load from concrete finishing machines and other construction loadings in the design of the bracing. Bracing shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and shall be shown in the girder erection plan. Falsework support brackets and braces shall not be welded to structural steel bridge members or to steel reinforcing bars. These braces shall be furnished, installed, and removed by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency.

6-02.3(17)G Testing Falsework Devices

The Contractor shall establish the load capacity and deflection (or settlement) of all friction collars and clamps, brackets, hangers, saddles, sand jacks, and similar devices utilizing a recognized independent testing Laboratory accepted by the Engineer. Page 6-80 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresLaboratory tests shall use the same materials and design that will be used on the

project. Test loads shall be applied to the device in the same manner that the device will experience loading on the project. All bolts or threaded rods used with the device shall be identified as to diameter, length, type, grade, and torque. All wedges, blocks, or shims used with the device on the project shall also be tested with the device. All adjustable jack systems used as a part of a device shall be tested with the device and shall have its maximum safe working extended height identified. Devices shall not be tested in contact with the permanent Structure. Independent members with the same properties as the permanent Structure shall be used to test device connections. At least 14 days prior to the test, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the test procedure and scale drawing showing how the device will be tested and how data will be collected. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer an opportunity to witness these tests. The independent testing Laboratory shall provide a certified test report which shall be signed and dated. The test report shall clearly identify the device tested including trademarks and model numbers; identify all parts and materials used, including grade of steel, or lumber, member section dimensions; location, size, and the maximum tested extended height of all adjustable jacks; indicate condition of materials used in the device; indicate the size, length and location of all welds; indicate how much torque was used with all bolts and threaded rods. The report shall describe how the device was tested, report the results of the test, provide a scale drawing of the device showing the location(s) of where deflections or settlements were measured, and show where load was applied. Deflections or settlements shall be measured at load increments and the results shall be clearly graphed and labeled. Prior to installation of falsework devices named in this section, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the certified test reports. The safe working load for shop manufactured devices named in this section shall be derived by dividing the ultimate strength by a safety factor of 2.0. The safe working load for field fabricated or field modified devices (including the use of timber blocks or wedges with the device) shall be determined by dividing the ultimate strength by a safety factor of 3.0. Working load shall include masses of all successive concrete placements, falsework, forms, all load transfer that takes place during post-tensioning, and all live loads; such as workers, Roadway finishing machines, and concrete delivery systems. The maximum allowable free end deflection of deck overhang brackets with combined dead and live working loads applied shall be 3/16 inch even though deflection may be compensated for by pre-cambering or setting the elevations high. The Contractor shall comply with all manufacturer’s specifications; including those relating to bolt torque, cleaning and oiling of parts, and the reuse of material. Devices which are deteriorated, bent, warped or have poorly fitted connections or welds, shall not be installed.

6-02.3(17)H Formwork Accessories

Formwork accessories such as form ties, form anchors, form hangers, anchoring inserts, and similar hardware shall be specifically identified in the formwork plans including the name and size of the hardware, manufacturer, safe working load, and factor of safety. The grade of steel shall also be indicated for threaded rods, coil rods, and similar hardware. Wire form ties shall not be used. Welding or clamping formwork accessories to Contract Plan reinforcing steel will not be allowed. Driven types of anchorages for fastening forms or form supports to concrete, and Contractor fabricated “J” hooks shall not be used. Field drilling of holes in prestressed girders is not allowed. M 41-10 Page 6-81 Concrete Structures 6-02Taper ties may be used provided the following conditions are met:

1.The structure is not designed to resist water pressure (pontoons, floating dolphins, detention vaults, or other concrete systems that are either placed in water or hold water).
2.After the taper tie is removed, plugs designed and intended for plugging taper tie holes shall be installed at each face of concrete. The plug shall be installed a minimum of 1½ inches clear from the face of concrete.
3.After the plug is installed, the hole shall be cleaned of all grease, contamination and foreign matter.
4.Holes on the exposed faces of concrete shall be patched and finished to match the surrounding concrete. The following table from ACI 347R-88 provides minimum safety factors for formwork accessories. The hardware proposed shall meet these minimum ultimate strength requirements or the manufacturer’s minimum requirements, whichever provides the greater factor of safety. The Contractor shall attach copies of the manufacturer’s catalog cuts and/or test data of hardware proposed to the formwork plans and submit the falsework and formwork Working Drawings with supporting calculations in accordance with Section 6-02.3(16) . In situations where catalog cuts and/or test data are not available, testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)G . Minimum Safety Factors of Formwork Accessories* AccessorySafety Factor Type of Construction Form Tie 2.0 All applications. Form Anchor 2.0 Formwork supporting form mass and concrete pressures only. Form Anchor 3.0 Formwork supporting masses of forms, concrete, construction live loads, and impact. Form Hangers 2.0 All applications. Anchoring Inserts 2.0 Placed in previous opposing concrete placement to act as an anchor for form tie. *Safety factors are based on ultimate strength of the formwork accessory. The bearing area of external holding devices shall be adequate to prevent excessive bearing stress on form lumber. Form ties and form hangers shall be arranged symmetrically on the supporting members to minimize twisting or rotation of the members. Form tie elongation shall not exceed the allowable deflection of the wale or member that it supports. Inserts, bolts, coil rods, and other fasteners shall be analyzed and designed for appropriately combined bending, shear, torsion, and tension stresses. The formwork shall not be attached to Contract Plan rebar or rebar cages. However, the Contractor may install additional reinforcing steel for formwork anchorage. Frictional resistance shall not be considered as contributing to the stability of a connection or connecting device, except those designed as friction connectors such as U-bolt friction-type connectors. Form anchors and anchoring inserts shall be designed considering concrete strength at time of loading, available embedment, location in the member, and any other factors affecting their working strength, and shall be installed in concrete in accordance with the manufacturer’s published requirements. Form anchors and anchoring inserts embedded in previous concrete placements shall not be loaded until the concrete has reached the required design strength. The required design strength of concrete for loading of an Page 6-82 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresanchor shall be shown in the formwork drawing if it is assumed that the anchor will be

loaded before the concrete has reached its 28-day strength. Installation of permanent concrete inserts, such as form ties hangers, or embedded anchor assemblies, shall permit removal of all metal to at least ½ inch below the concrete surface. Holes shall be patched in accordance with Section 6-02.3(14) . During removal of the outer unit, the bond between the concrete and the inner unit or rod shall not be broken.

6-02.3(17)I Timber Connections

Timber connections shall be designed in accordance with the methods, stresses, and loads allowed in the Timber Construction Manual, Third Edition by the American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC). Timber falsework and formwork connections shall be designed using wet condition stresses for all installations West of the Cascade Range crest line and by criteria provided in the following sections. Frictional resistance shall not be considered as contributing to the stability of a timber connection.

6-02.3(17)I1 Bolted Connections

Tabulated values in the AITC Timber Construction Manual , Current Edition are based on square posts. For a round post or pile, the main member thickness shall be the side of a square post having the same cross-sectional area as the round post used. The AITC Table 6.20 for Douglas Fir-Larch bolt Group 3 and for Hem-Fir bolt Group 8 show design values for bolts to be used when the load is applied either parallel or perpendicular to the direction of the wood grain. When the load is applied at an angle to the grain, as is the case with falsework bracing, the design value for the main member shall be obtained from the Hankinson formula shown in the AITC manual. Design values in the AITC Table 6.20 apply only to three-member joints (bolt in double- shear) in which the side members are each ½ the thickness of the main member. This joint configuration is not typical of bridge falsework where side members are usually much smaller than main members. For two-member joints (single shear bolt condition), the AITC Table 6.20 values shall be adjusted by a single shear load factor as follows:

1.0.75 for installations East of the Cascade Range crest line, except as shown in item 3 below;
2.0.50 for installations West of the Cascade Range crest line; and
3.0.50 for load acting at an angle to the bolt axis, as is the case with longitudinal bracing when falsework bents are skewed. Except for connections in falsework adjacent to or over railroads or Roadways, threaded rods and coil rods may be used in place of bolts of the same diameter with no reduction in the tabulated values. At openings for Roadways and railroads, all connections shall be bolted using ⅝-inch diameter or larger through bolts. Bolt holes shall be a minimum 1/32 inch to a maximum ⅛ inch larger than the bolt diameter. A washer not less than a standard cut washer shall be installed between the wood and the bolt head and between the wood and the nut to distribute the bearing stress under the bolt head and nut and to avoid crushing the fibers. In lieu of standard cut washers, metal plates or straps with dimensions at least equal to that of a standard cut washer may be substituted. When steel bars or shapes are used as diagonal bracing, the tabulated design values shown in AITC Table 6.20 for the main members loaded parallel to grain (P value) are increased 75 percent for joints made with bolts ½ inch or less in diameter, 25 percent for joints made with bolts 1½ inch in diameter, and proportionally for intermediate diameters. No increase in the tabulated values is allowed for perpendicular-to-grain loading (Q value). M 41-10 Page 6-83 Concrete Structures 6-02Clearance requirements for end, edge, and bolt spacing distance shall be as shown below. All distances are measured from the end or side of the wood member to the center of the bolt hole. For members which are subject to load reversals the larger controlling distances shall be used for design. For parallel-to-grain loading, the minimum distances for full design load:
1.In tension, minimum end distance shall be seven times the bolt diameter;
2.In compression, minimum end distance shall be four times the bolt diameter; and
3.In tension or compression, the minimum edge distance shall be one and one-half times the bolt diameter. For perpendicular-to-grain loading, the minimum distance for full design load:
1.Minimum end distance shall be four times the bolt diameter;
2.Edge distance toward which the load is acting shall be at least four times the bolt diameter; and
3.Distance on the opposite edge shall be at least 1½-bolt diameters. Minimum clearance (spacing) between adjacent bolts in a row shall be four times the bolt diameter, measured center-to-center of the bolt holes. When more than two bolts are used in a line parallel to the axis of the side member, additional requirements shall be followed as shown in the AITC manual.

6-02.3(17)I2 Lag Screw Connections

Design values for lag screws subject to withdrawal loading are found in AITC Table 6.27. Values for wood having a specific gravity of 0.51 for Douglas Fir-Larch or 0.42 for Hem-Fir shall be assumed when using the table. The withdrawal values are in pounds per inch of penetration of the threaded part of the lag screw into the side grain of the member holding the point, with the axis of the screw perpendicular to that member. The maximum load on a given screw shall not exceed the allowable tensile strength of the screw at the root section. AITC recommends against subjecting lag screws to end-grain withdrawal loading. However, if this condition cannot be avoided, the design value shall be 75 percent of the corresponding value for withdrawal from the side grain. Values in the Group II wood species column shall be used for Douglas Fir-Larch and the Group III wood species column shall be used for Hem-Fir. When the load is applied at an angle to the grain, as is the case with falsework bracing, the design value shall be obtained from the Hankinson formula shown in the AITC manual. When lag screws are subjected to a combined lateral and withdrawal loading, as would be the case with longitudinal bracing when the falsework bents are skewed, the effect of the lateral and withdrawal forces shall be determined separately. The withdrawal component of the applied load shall not exceed the allowable value in withdrawal. The lateral component of the applied load shall not exceed the allowable lateral load value. Lag screws shall be inserted in lead holes as follows:

1.The clearance hole for the shank shall have the same diameter as the shank, and the same depth of penetration as the length of unthreaded shank;
2.The lead hole for the threaded portion shall have a diameter equal to 60 to 75 percent of the shank diameter and a length equal to at least the length of the threaded portion. The larger percentile figure in each range shall apply to screws of the greater diameters used in Group II wood species;
3.The threaded portion of the screw shall be inserted in its lead hole by turning with a wrench, not by driving with a hammer; and Page 6-84 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures4. To facilitate insertion, soap or other lubricant shall be used on the screws or in the

lead hole.

6-02.3(17)I3 Drift Pin and Drift Bolt Connections

When drift pins or drift bolts are used, the required length and penetration shall be determined using the following criteria. The lateral load-carrying capacity of drift pins and drift bolts driven into the side grain of a wood member shall be limited to 75 percent of the design values for a common bolt of the same diameter and length in the main member. For drift pin connections, the pin penetration into the connected members shall be increased to compensate for the absence of a bolt head and nut. For drift bolts or pins driven into the end grain of a member, the lateral load-carrying capacity shall be limited to 60 percent of the allowable side grain load (perpendicular to grain value) for an equal diameter bolt with nut. To develop this allowable load the drift bolt or pin shall penetrate at least 12 diameters into the end grain. To fully develop the allowable load of the drift bolts or pins, they shall be driven into predrilled holes, 1/16 inch less in diameter than the drift pin or bolt diameter. The criteria shown in the AITC Timber Construction Manual, Current Edition shall apply to drift bolt or pin connection allowable loads for the following conditions:

1.Withdrawal resistance; and
2.When there are more than two drift bolts or pins in a joint, allowable loads shall be further reduced by applying applicable modification factors shown in the AITC Table 6.3.

6-02.3(17)I4 Nailed and Spiked Joints

Joints using nails or spikes shall conform to the provisions of AITC. For side grain withdrawal, the values in AITC Table 6.35 for wood having a specific gravity of 0.51 for Douglas Fir-Larch and a specific gravity of 0.42 for Hem-Fir shall be used. End grain withdrawal shall not be used. For lateral loading, the values in AITC Table 6.36 for wood species Group II for Douglas Fir-Larch and wood species Group III for Hem-Fir shall be used. Diameters listed in the tables apply to fasteners before application of protective coatings. When more than one nail or spike is used in a joint, the total design value for the joint in withdrawal or lateral resistance shall be the sum of the design values for the individual nails or spikes. The tabulated design values for lateral loads are valid only when the nail penetrates into the main member at least 11 diameters for Douglas Fir-Larch and 13 diameters for Hem- Fir. Note that the values are maximum values for the type and size of fastener shown. The tabulated values shall not be increased even if the actual penetration is exceeded. When main member penetration is less than 11 diameters for Douglas Fir-Larch and 13 diameters for Hem-Fir, the design value shall be determined by straight-line interpolation between zero and the tabulated load, except that penetration shall not be less than ⅓ of that specified. Double-headed or duplex nails used in falsework and formwork construction are shorter than common wire nails or box nails of the same size designation. They have less penetration into the main member and therefore their load-carrying capacity shall be adjusted accordingly. Nail and spike minimum spacing in timber connections shall be as follows:

1.The average center-to-center distance between adjacent nails, measured in any direction, shall not be less than the required penetration into the main member for the size of nail being used; and M 41-10 Page 6-85 Concrete Structures 6-022. The minimum end distance in the side member, and the minimum edge distance in both the side member and the main member, shall not be less than ½ of the required penetration. Allowable values for withdrawal and lateral load resistance are reduced when toe nails are used in accordance with the following:
1.For withdrawal loading, the design load shall not exceed ⅔ of the value shown in the applicable design table; and
2.For lateral loading, the design load shall not exceed 5⁄6 of the value shown in the applicable design table. Toe nails are recommended to be driven at an approximate angle of 30 degrees with the piece and started approximately ⅓ of the length of the nail from the end or side of the piece.

6-02.3(17)I5 Timber Connection Adjustment for Duration of Load

Tabulated values for timber fasteners are for normal duration of load and may be increased for short duration loading, except for connections used in falsework and formwork for post tensioned Structures and staged construction sequences. Duration of load adjustment for timber connections shall not be allowed for all post tensioned Structures and for staged construction sequences where delayed and/or staged loading occurs for any type of concrete Structure. The adjustment for duration of load as described in this section applies only to design values for timber connectors, such as nails, bolts, and lag screws. Allowable stresses for timber and structural steel components used in the connection, as described in Section 6-02.3(17)B , are maximums and thus shall not be increased. Tabulated values for nails, bolts, and lag screws may be adjusted by the following duration-of-load factors:

1.1.25 for falsework design governed by the minimum design horizontal load or greater (3 percent or greater of the dead load),
2.1.33 for falsework design governed by wind load, and
3.2.00 for falsework design governed by impact loading.

6-02.3(17)J Face Lumber, Studs, Wales, and Metal Forms

Elements of this section shall be designed for the loads, allowable stresses, deflections, and conditions which pertain from other Subsections of Section 6-02.3(17) . Forms battered or inclined above the concrete will tend to lift up as concrete is placed and shall have positive anchorage or counterweights designed to resist uplift and shall be shown in the formwork plans. Where the concrete pouring sequence causes fresh concrete to be significantly higher along one side of tied forms than the opposite side, a positive form anchorage system shall be designed capable of resisting the imbalance of horizontal thrust, and prevent the dislocation and sliding of the entire form unit. Wooden forms shall be faced with smooth sanded, exterior plywood. This plywood shall meet the requirements of the National Bureau of Standards, U.S. Product Standard PS 1, and the design specification of the American Plywood Association (APA). Each full sheet shall bear the APA stamp. The Contractor shall list in the form plans the grade and class of plywood. If the Engineer accepts the manufacturer’s certification of structural properties, the Contractor may use plywood that does not carry the APA stamp. Plywood panels stamped “shop” or “shop cutting”, shall not be used. Plyform is an APA plywood specifically designed and manufactured for concrete forming. Plyform differs from conventional exterior plywood grades in strength and the exterior face panels are sanded smooth and factory oiled. Likewise, there is a significant difference between grades designated Class 1, Class 2, and Structural I Plyform. Page 6-86 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe grades of plywood for various form applications shall be as follows:

1.Traffic and Pedestrian Barriers (except those that will receive an architectural surface treatment) – Plywood used for these surfaces shall be APA grade High-Density Overlaid (HDO) Plyform Class I. But if the Contractor coats the form to prevent it from leaving joint and grain marks on the surface, plywood that meets or exceeds APA grades B-B Plyform Class I or B-C (Group I species) may be used. Under this option, the Contractor shall provide for the Engineer’s acceptance a 4-foot-square, test panel of concrete formed with the same plywood and coating as proposed in the form plans. This panel shall include one form joint along its centerline. The Contractor shall apply coating material, according to the manufacturer’s instructions, before applying chemical release agents.
2.Other Exposed Surfaces (all but those on traffic and pedestrian barriers) – Plywood used to form these surfaces shall meet or exceed the requirements of APA grades B-B Plyform Class I or B-C (Group I series). If one face is less than B quality, the B (or better) face shall contact the concrete.
3.Unexposed Surfaces (such as the underside of the bridge deck between girders, the interiors of box girders, or other concrete exposed surfaces not viewable to the public, and traffic and pedestrian barriers where surfaces will receive an architectural treatment) – Plywood used to form these surfaces may be APA grade CDX, provided the Contractor complies with stress and deflection requirements stated elsewhere in these Specifications. Form joints on an exposed surface shall be in a horizontal or vertical plane. But in wingwalls and box girders, side form joints shall be placed at right angles and parallel to the Roadway grade. Joints parallel to studs or joists shall be backed by a stud or joist. Joints at right angles to studs and joists shall be backed by a stud or other backing the Engineer accepts. Perpendicular backing is not required if studs or joists are spaced:
1.Nine inches or less on center and covered with ½-inch plywood, or
2.Twelve inches or less on center and covered with ¾-inch plywood. The face grain of plywood shall run perpendicular to studs or joists unless shown otherwise on the Contractor’s formwork Working Drawings. Proposals to deviate from the perpendicular orientation shall be accompanied by supporting calculations of the stresses and deflections. Forming for all exposed curved surfaces shall follow the shape of the curve shown in the Contract Plans and shall not be chorded except as follows. On any retaining wall that follows a horizontal circular curve, the wall stems may be a series of short chords if:
1.The chords within the panel are the same length, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer;
2.The chords do not vary from a true curve by more than ½ inch at any point; and
3.All panel points are on the true curve. Where architectural treatment is required, the angle point for chords in wall stems shall fall at vertical rustication joints. For exposed surfaces of abutments, wingwalls, piers, retaining walls, and columns, the Contractor shall build forms of plywood at least ¾ inch thick with studs no more than 12 inches on center. The Engineer may allow exceptions, but deflection of the plywood, studs, or wales shall never exceed 1⁄360 of the span (or 1⁄270 of the span for unexposed surfaces, including the bottom of the deck slab between girders). All form plywood shall be at least ½ inch thick except on sharply curved surfaces. There, the Contractor may use ¼-inch plywood if it is backed firmly with heavier material. M 41-10 Page 6-87 Concrete Structures 6-02Round columns or rounded pier shafts shall be formed with a self-supporting metal shell form or form tube that leaves a smooth, nonspiralling surface. Wood forms are not permitted. Metal forms shall not be used elsewhere unless the Engineer is satisfied with the surface and allows use in writing. The Engineer may withdraw allowing use of metal forms at any time. If permitted to use a combination of wood and metal in forms, the Contractor shall coat the forms so that the texture produced by the wood matches that of the metal. Aluminum shall not be used for metal forms. For design purposes, the Contractor shall assume that on vertical surfaces concrete exerts 150 pounds per square foot per foot of depth. However, when the depth is reached where the rate of placement controls the pressure, the following table applies: Rate of Placing Feet per HourPressure, Pounds per Square Foot for Temperature of Concrete as Shown 60°F 70°F and Above 2 470 375 3 640 565 4 725 625 5 815 690 6 900 750 7 990 815 8 1,075 875 9 1,165 935 10 1,250 1,000 15 1,670 1,300 The pressures in the above table have been increased to provide an allowance for the vibration and impact. All corners shall be beveled ¾ inch. However, footings, footing pedestals, and seals need not be beveled unless required in the Plans. All forms shall be as mortar-tight as possible with no water standing in them as the concrete is placed. The Contractor shall apply a parting compound on forms for exposed concrete surfaces. This compound shall be a chemical release agent that permits the forms to separate cleanly from the concrete. The compound shall not penetrate or stain the surface and shall not attract dirt or other foreign matter. After the forms are removed, the concrete surface shall be dust-free and have a uniform appearance. The Contractor shall apply the compound at the manufacturer’s recommended rate to produce a surface free of dusting action and yet provide easy removal of the forms. The Engineer may reject forms that will not produce a satisfactory surface.

6-02.3(17)K Concrete Forms on Steel Spans

Concrete forms on all steel Structures shall be removable and shall not remain in place. Where needed, the forms shall have openings for truss or girder members. Each opening shall be large enough to leave at least 1½ inches between the concrete and steel on all sides of the steel member after the forms have been removed. Unit Contract prices cover all costs related to these openings. The Contractor shall not weld any part of the form to steel members. Page 6-88 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe compression member or bottom connection of cantilever formwork support brackets

shall bear either within 6 inches maximum vertically of the bottom flange or within 6 inches maximum horizontally of a vertical web stiffener. The Contractor’s bridge deck form system shall be designed to prevent rotation of the steel girder. This can be achieved by temporary struts and ties or other methods the Contractor shows to be effective. Partial depth cantilever formwork support brackets that do not conform to the above requirements shall not be used unless the Contractor submits Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of details showing the additional formwork struts and ties used to brace the steel girder against web distortion caused by the partial depth bracket. If the Engineer permits bolt holes in the web to support form brackets, the holes shall be shop drilled unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall fill the holes with fully torqued ASTM F3125 Grade A325 bolts in accordance with Section 6-03.3(33) . Each bolt head shall be placed on the exterior side of the web. There shall be no holes made in the flanges.

6-02.3(17)L Finishing Machine Support System

Before using finishing machines, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of detailed drawings that show the system proposed to support it. The Contractor shall not attach this (or any other) equipment support system to the sides or suspend it from any girder unless the Engineer permits. The Engineer will not permit such a method if it will unduly alter stress patterns or create too much stress in the girder.

6-02.3(17)M Restricted Overhead Clearance Sign

6-02.3(17)M1 Vehicular Traffic

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 15 working days before the anticipated start of each falsework and girder erection operation whenever such falsework or girders will reduce clearances available to the public traffic. Falsework openings shall not be more restrictive to traffic than shown in the Contract Plans. Where the height of vehicular openings through falsework is less than 15 feet, a W 12-2 “Low Clearance Symbol Sign” shall be erected on the Shoulder in advance of the falsework and two or more W 12-301 and/or W 12-302 signs shall be attached to the falsework to provide accurate usable clearance information over the entire falsework opening. The posted low clearance shall include an allowance for anticipated falsework girder deflection (rounded-up to the next whole inch) due to design dead load, including all successive concrete pours. W 12-302 signs shall be used to designate prominent clearance restrictions and limits of usable clearance. In addition, where the clearance is less than the legal height limit (14 feet), a W 12-2 sign shall be erected in advance of the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around. A W 13-501 sign indicating the distance to the low clearance shall be installed below the advance sign. The Engineer will furnish the above noted signs and the Contractor shall erect and maintain them, all in accordance with Section 1-10.3(3) .

6-02.3(17)M2 Railroad Traffic

When erecting falsework that restricts overhead clearance above a railroad track, the Contractor shall place restricted overhead clearance signs in accordance with the railroad requirements. Unit Contract prices cover all costs relating to these signs.

6-02.3(17)N Removal of Falsework and Forms

The Contractor may request to remove forms based on the criteria in the table below. Both compressive strength and minimum time criteria shall be met if both are listed in the applicable row. The minimum time shall be from the time of the last concrete placement in the forms. In no case shall the Contractor remove forms or falsework without the Engineer’s concurrence. M 41-10 Page 6-89 Concrete Structures 6-02Concrete Placed InPercent of Specified Minimum Compressive Strength1Minimum Compressive Strength1Minimum Time Side forms not supporting the concrete weight, including columns, walls, crossbeams, nonsloping box girder webs, abutments, and traffic and pedestrian barriers.3 days or 1,400 psi 18 hours Side forms of footings, pile caps, and shaft caps.218 hours Crossbeams, sloping box girder webs, struts, inclined columns, inclined walls, and other forms that support the concrete weight.80 5 days Bridge decks supported on stringers, beam, or girders.380 14 days Box girders, T-beam girders, and flat-slab Superstructure.380 14 days Arches380 21 days 1Strength shall be proved by test cylinders made from the last concrete placed into the form. The cylinders shall be cured according to FOP for AASHTO R 100. 2Curing compound shall be immediately applied to the sides when forms are removed. 3Where continuous spans or segments are involved, the time for all spans will be determined by the last concrete placed affecting any span. Before releasing supports from beneath beams and girders, the Contractor shall remove forms from columns to enable the Engineer to inspect the column concrete. Curing shall comply with the requirements of Section 6-02.3(11) . The concrete surface shall not become dry during form removal if removed during the cure period. Before placing forms for traffic and pedestrian barriers, the Contractor shall completely release all falsework under spans. The Engineer may allow leaving in place forms for footings in cofferdams or cribs. This decision will be based on whether removing them would harm the cofferdam or crib and whether the forms will show in the finished Structure. All cells of a box girder Structure which have permanent access shall have all forms completely removed, including the bridge deck forms. All debris and all projections into the cells shall be removed. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, the bridge deck interior forms in all other cells where no permanent access is available, may be left in place. Falsework and forms supporting sloping exterior webs shall not be released until the bridge deck and deck overhang concrete has obtained its removal strength and number of days criteria listed in the table above. Stem reshoring shall not be used. Open joints shown in the Plans shall have all forms completely removed, including Styrofoam products and form anchors, allowing the completed Structure to move freely. If the Contractor intends to support or suspend falsework and formwork from the bridge Structure while the falsework and formwork is being removed, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the falsework and formwork removal plan and calculations. The falsework and formwork removal plan shall include the following:

1.The location and size of all cast-in-place falsework lowering holes and how the holes are to be filled; Page 6-90 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures2. The location, capacity, and size of all attachments, beams, cables, and other hardware

used to attach to the Structure or support the falsework and formwork;

3.The type, capacity and factor of safety, weight, and spacing of points of reaction of lowering equipment; and
4.The weight at each support point of the falsework and formwork being lowered. All other forms shall be removed whether above or below the level of the ground or water. Sections 6-02.3(7) and 6-02.3(8) govern form removal for concrete exposed to sea water or to alkaline water or soil. The forms inside of hollow piers, girders, abutments, or other enclosed concrete surfaces shall be removed through openings shown in the Plans or as allowed by the Engineer.

6-02.3(17)O Early Concrete Test Cylinder Breaks

The fabrication, curing, and testing of the early cylinders shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Early cylinders are defined as all cylinders tested in advance of the design age of 28 days whose purpose is to determine the in-place strength of concrete in a Structure prior to applying loads or stresses. The Contractor shall retain a testing Laboratory to perform this Work. Testing Laboratories’ equipment shall be calibrated within 1 year prior to testing and testers shall be either ACI certified or qualified in accordance with AASHTO R 18. The concrete cylinders shall be molded in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 from concrete last placed in the forms and representative of the quality of concrete placed in that pour. The cylinders shall be cured in the field in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 Section 10.2 Field Curing. The concrete cylinders shall be tested for compressive strength in accordance with AASHTO T 22. The number of early cylinder breaks shall be in accordance with the Contractor’s need and as allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of all test results, proof of equipment calibration, and tester’s certification. The Contractor shall not remove forms without the concurrence of the Engineer. All costs in connection with furnishing cylinder molds, fabrication, curing, and testing of early cylinders shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items of Work involved.

6-02.3(18) Placing Anchor Bolts

The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in setting anchor bolts in piers, abutments, or pedestals:

1.If set in the wet concrete, the bolts shall be accurately placed before the concrete is placed.
2.If the bolts are set in drilled holes and grouted, hole diameter shall exceed bolt diameter by at least 1 inch. Grouting shall comply with Section 6-02.3(20) .
3.If the bolts are set in pipe and grouted, grouting shall comply with Section 6-02.3(20) .
4.Resin bonded anchors systems shall comply with Section 6-02.3(18)A.
5.If freezing weather occurs before bolts can be grouted into sleeves or holes, they shall be filled with an accepted antifreeze solution (non-evaporating).

6-02.3(18)A Resin Bonded Anchors

The resin bonded anchor system shall include the nut, washer, and threaded anchor rod which is installed into hardened concrete with a resin bonding material. M 41-10 Page 6-91 Concrete Structures 6-02Resin bonding material used in overhead and horizontal application shall be specifically recommended by the resin manufacturer for those applications. Resin bonding material used in submerged liquid environment shall be specifically recommended by the resin manufacturer for this application. Threaded anchor rod and nuts, resin bonding material, embedment depth and ultimate anchor tensile capacity requirements are specified in Section 9-06.4 . The Contractor shall submit items 1 and 2 below to the Engineer for all resin bonded anchor systems. If the resin bonded anchor system and anchor diameter are not listed in the current WSDOT Qualified Products List, the Contractor shall submit items 1, 2 and 3 with the RAM in accordance with Section 1-06.1(2). For resin bonded anchor systems that are installed in a submerged liquid environment the Contractor shall submit items 1, 2, and 4 below. If the resin bonded anchor system and anchor diameter are not listed in the current WSDOT Qualified Products List, the Contractor shall submit items 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the RAM in accordance with Section 1-06.1(2).

1.The resin manufacturer's written installation procedure for the anchors.
2.The manufacturer's certificate of compliance for the threaded anchor rod certifying that the anchor rod meets these requirements.
3.Test results by an independent laboratory certifying that the threaded anchor rod system meets the ultimate anchor tensile capacity specified in Section 9-06.4 . The tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 488.
4.For threaded anchors intended to be installed in submerged liquid environments the Contractor shall submit tests performed by an independent laboratory within the past 24 months which certifies that anchors installed in a submerged environment meet the ultimate anchor tensile capacity specified in Section 9-06.4 . The embedment depth of the anchors shall be as specified in the Plans. If the embedment depth of the anchor is not specified in the Plans then the minimum embedment depth shall not be less than the embedment depth specified in Section 9-06.4 . The anchors shall be installed in accordance with the resin manufacturer's written procedure. Holes shall be drilled as specified in the Plans. Holes may be drilled with a rotary hammer drill when core drilling is not specified in the Plans. If holes are core drilled, the sides of the holes shall be roughened with a rotary hammer drill after core drilling. Holes shall be prepared in accordance with the resin manufacturer's recommendations and shall meet the minimum requirements as specified herein. Holes drilled into concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of debris, dust, and laitance prior to installing the threaded rod and resin bonding material. Holes shall not have standing liquid at the time of installation of the threaded anchor rod. The anchor nuts shall be tightened to the following torques when the embedment equals or exceeds the minimum embedment specified. Anchor Diameter (inch) Minimum Torque (ft-lbs) Maximum Torque (ft-lbs) 3/8 12 18 ½ 22 35 5/8 55 80 ¾ 106 140 7/8 165 190 1 195 225 1-¼ 370 525 Page 6-92 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresWhen the anchor embedment depth in the Plans is less than the minimum values

specified in Section 9-06.4 , the anchor nuts shall be tightened to the torque values specified in the Plans, or as recommended by the resin bonded anchor system manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

6-02.3(19) Bridge Bearings

Bridge bearings include the following:

1.Elastomeric bearing pads conforming to Section 9-31.8(1) . The Contractor shall adhere the elastomeric bearing pads to the concrete surface using the manufacturer’s recommended adhesive product.
2.Fabricated bearing assemblies including, at a minimum, the following:
a.High-Load Multi-Rotational (HLMR) bridge bearing assemblies, including the following:
i.Disc bearings, functioning as guided unidirectional or fixed or multi- directional bearings, and consisting of an upper and a lower unit. ii. Spherical bearings, functioning as guided or fixed or multi-directional bearings, and consisting of an upper, a middle, and a lower unit.
b.Fabric pad bearings and transverse stop bearings, functioning as guided bearings and consisting of an upper and a lower unit.
c.Pin bearings, functioning as guided or fixed bearings, and consisting of an upper, a middle, and a lower unit. The entire bearing assembly shall be supplied by a single bearing manufacturer.

6-02.3(19)A Design Requirements for HLMR Bearing Assemblies

The Contractor shall design HLMR bearing assemblies based on the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications and the following:

1.The bearing assembly design requirements for loads, movements, and rotations shall be as shown In the Plans.
2.The bearing assembly shall be removable and replaceable by raising the bridge superstructure 1/4-inch maximum. The bearing shall be held in place by recessing the upper and lower keeper plates and by providing recessed bolted keeper bars on the side of bearing removal.
3.The area of the polyether urethane disc for disc bearings shall be designed for an unfactored stress of 5,000 psi ± 5 percent at full dead load and live load.
4.The mechanical interlock of the solid or woven PTFE sheets to the steel substrates shall be sufficient to develop a horizontal force equal to 10-percent of the maximum unfactored vertical load for spherical bearings with an external restrainer, and 25-percent of the maximum unfactored vertical load for spherical bearings without an external restrainer.
5.The area of the PTFE surface shall be designed so that the contact pressure does not exceed the maximum contact pressure specified in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. The contact stress shall be determined at the strength limit state as specified In the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
6.The minimum coefficient of friction on PTFE surfaces used for design shall be those corresponding to 68°F in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
7.The anchorage of the sole plates, masonry plates, and guide bars to the supporting structural element shall be designed for the maximum horizontal design force per bearing shown in the Plans, or 20-percent of the maximum unfactored vertical design force per bearing, whichever is greater. M 41-10 Page 6-93 Concrete Structures 6-028. The sole and masonry plates shall have leveling capabilities.
9.The guide bars shall maintain all guided components within the guides at all points of translation and rotation of the bearing.

6-02.3(19)B Submittals

6-02.3(19)B1 HLMR Bearing Design Calculations Submittal

The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of design calculations for all HLMR bearing components, including the polyether urethane disc, shear pin, base plates, bearing plates, sole plates, masonry plates, guide bars, keeper plates and bars, and anchor bolts. The submittal shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1.Bending stresses in the plates due to bearing pressure at maximum design load and eccentricity.
2.Concrete bearing pressure under the plates at maximum bearing pressure and eccentricity.
3.Bearing clearances at maximum load and rotation. The calculated clearances shall include the effects of anticipated Initial set and modified center of rotation.
4.Shear stress in the disc bearing shear pin at maximum horizontal load.
5.Design of all connections and mating surfaces.
6.Compressive stress on all sliding surfaces at maximum and minimum design loads, including rotation.

6-02.3(19)B2 HLMR Bearing Manufacturer Experience Submittal

The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the name of the HLMR bearing manufacturer with a certification of HLMR bearing manufacturing experience. The certification of experience shall include a list of at least five HLMR bearing Installations performed by the bearing manufacturer on previous projects. The list shall include the following Information at a minimum for each installation:

1.Project Name and Location (Bridge name and highway number).
2.Date of installation.
3.Governmental Agency/Owner.
4.Name, address and phone number of the Governmental Agency’s/Owner’s representative.

6-02.3(19)B3 Fabrication Shop Drawing Submittal

The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of bearing fabrication shop drawings, including, at a minimum, the following:

1.Bearing schedule identifying location and bearing type as described in
2.Minimum and maximum horizontal and vertical service loads for HLMR bearings.
3.Magnitude and direction of movements for HLMR bearings at all bearing support points.
4.Minimum and maximum rotation capacity for HLMR bearings.
5.Construction rotation requirements for HLMR bearings.
6.Plan and elevation of the assembled bearing and each of the components showing dimensions and tolerances.
7.Complete details of all components and sections showing all materials incorporated into the bearing. Page 6-94 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures8. All AASHTO, ASTM and other material designations.

9.All weld callouts with supporting Weld Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and associated Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs) as required.
10.All surface finishes and coating requirements.
11.Bearing manufacturer’s recommendations and procedures for bearing assembly shipment, storage, and installation.

6-02.3(19)B4 Submittals of Acceptance Test Reports and Certificates

The Contractor shall submit the following production samples and test reports and certificates for fabricated bridge bearing assemblies as applicable:

1.A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a six-inch square by 1/8-inch thick sample of PTFE taken from the lot of production material.
2.A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a six-inch square by 1-inch thick sample of pre-formed fabric pad taken from the lot of production material.
3.Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of Manufacturers’ Certificates of Compliance for the PTFE, polyether urethane, pre-formed fabric pad duck, silicone grease, epoxy gel, and resin filler.
4.Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of certified mill test reports for all steel and stainless steel in the bearing assemblies.
5.Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of certified test reports confirming that the pre- formed fabric pads meet the specific requirements of proof load.

6-02.3(19)B5 Quality Assurance and Final Shop Inspection Process Submittal

The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the independent inspection entity performing the Quality Assurance Inspection and Final Shop Inspection as specified in Section 6-02.3(19)F . The submittal shall include, at a minimum, the name, address, phone number, and contact person of the inspection entity performing the Inspection, the proposed Quality Assurance Inspection Program, and the forms to be used for the Quality Assurance Inspection Program.

6-02.3(19)B6 HLMR Bearing Testing Procedure Submittal

The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the name, address, phone number, and contact person of the testing entity performing the required bearing testing specified in Section 6-02.3(19)E . The testing entity shall be one of the following:

1.An independent testing agency.
2.The HLMR bearing manufacturer, with Independent verification by the inspection entity performing the certified shop Inspection of the bearings.

6-02.3(19)B7 HLMR Bearing Assembly Inspection Reports and Certificates

The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the periodic inspection reports of the independent inspection entity performing the required certified shop inspection, at a frequency defined in the Quality Assurance Inspection Program of Sections 6-02.3(19)B5 and 6-02.3(19)F2 . The daily inspection reports shall report on the shop fabrication and testing activities relating to the bearing assemblies, and their conformance to the specification requirements. The Contractor shall submit written documentation from the bearing manufacturer and the independent inspection entity certifying that the bearing assemblies have been manufactured in full compliance with the specification requirements. M 41-10 Page 6-95 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(19)C Bearing Assembly Fabrication The edges of all components shall be broken by grinding so that there are no sharp edges.

6-02.3(19)C1 Flatness and Manufacturing Tolerances

Flatness of bearing surfaces shall be determined by the following method:

1.A precision straightedge, longer than the nominal dimension to be measured shall be placed in contact with the surface to be measured as parallel to it as possible.
2.A feeler gauge having an accuracy equal to the tolerance allowed ± 0.001-inch, shall be selected and inserted under the straightedge.
3.Surfaces are acceptable for flatness if the feeler gauge does not pass under the straightedge.
4.In determining the flatness, the straightedge may be located in any position on the surface being measured. Flatness tolerances are defined as follows:
1.Class A tolerance = 0.001 x nominal dimension
2.Class B tolerance = 0.002 x nominal dimension
3.Class C tolerance = 0.005 x nominal dimension Manufacturing tolerances for bearing components are as follows: Polyether Urethane Disc Diameter: ± 1/8-inch Thickness: - 0, +1/16-inch Flatness: Class B tolerance Discs shall be manufactured from a single piece Spherically Curved Surfaces Radii: ± 1-percent, surfaces shall be parallel to each other Spherical Surface Profile: ± 0.0002Dh or 1/128-inches, whichever is greater, where D = length of chord (in inches) between the ends of the PTFE surface in the direction of rotation, and h = projection of the PTFE (in inches) above the top of the confining recess. PTFE Sheet Plan dimensions: Total nominal design area -0, + 1/8-inch Thickness: - 0, +1/64-inch Flatness: Class A tolerance, both surfaces Pre-formed Fabric Pad Plan dimensions: - 0, + 3/16-inch Thickness: - 1/16, + 3/16-inch Surface Finish: For pre-formed fabric pads fabricated from multiple layers, all pad edges shall be free from visible horizontal displacement between the individual layers Page 6-96 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresStainless Steel Sheet

Plan dimension: - 0, + 3/16-inch Flatness: Class A tolerance, both surfaces Backing, Bearing, Masonry, Sliding, and Sole Plates of HLMR Bearings Plan dimensions Greater than 30-inches: - 0, + 3/16-inch 30-inches or less: - 0, + 1/8-inch Thickness: - 1/32, + 1/8-inch Flatness: Class A tolerance, side in contact with steel, polyether urethane disc, or PTFE Class C tolerance, side in contact with epoxy gel or grout or concrete Width and length of PFTE recess: - 0, + 0.04-inch of PTFE sheet size The maximum gap between the external restrainer and the circular base plate, and the walls of a recess and a recessed plate, for a spherical bearing shall be 0.04-inches. Backing, Masonry, and Sole Plates of Pin, Fabric Pad, and Transverse Stop Bearings Plan dimensions: - 0, + 3/16-inch Thickness: - 0, + 3/16-inch Flatness: Class A tolerance, side in contact with stainless steel sheet, sole plate and pre- formed fabric pad Class C tolerance, side in contact with epoxy gel or grout or concrete Width and length of PTFE recess: - 0, + 1/16-inch of PTFE sheet size The maximum gap between the external restrainer and the circular base plate, and the walls of a recess and a recessed plate, for a spherical bearing shall be 0.04-inches. Guide Bar and Keeper Bar Length: ± 1/8 inch Section Dimensions: ± 1/16-inch Flatness: Class A tolerance, side in contact with steel or PTFE Bar to bar tolerance: ± 1/32-inch Bars shall not be more than 1/32-inch out of parallel Bearing Block Plan dimensions: - 0, + 1/8 inch Thickness: ± 0.015-inch Groove radius for pin: As shown in the Plans M 41-10 Page 6-97 Concrete Structures 6-02Keeper ring grooves in bearing block Radius, inner and outer: ± 0.005-inch Depth of groove: ± 0.010-inch Keeper Ring Radius, inner and outer: ± 0.010-inch Thickness: ± 0.030-inch Pin Length, shldr to shldr: -0.020, + 0-inch Diameter: As shown in the Plans Overall Height HLMR bearing: - 1/16, + 3/16-inch Fabric pad bearing: - 1/16, + 3/16-inch Pin bearing: - 0, + 10-percent

6-02.3(19)C2 HLMR Bearing Specific Fabrication Requirements

All bolted connections between structural steel surfaces shall meet the maximum spacing for sealing bolts in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. When the following components are shown in the Plans as part of the HLMR bearing assembly, the following specific fabrication requirements shall apply:

1.PTFE Sheet:
a.The thickness of solid PTFE sheet shall be a minimum of 1/8-inch and a maximum of 3/16-inch. Solid PTFE sheet shall be recessed for a depth equal to one-half of its thickness into the material it is bonded to.
b.The thickness of woven PTFE fabric, if used, shall be a minimum of 1/16-inch and a maximum of 1/8-inch.
c.Dimpled PTFE, if shown in the Plans, shall be unfilled and shall have a maximum thickness of 3/16-inch. Dimples shall be placed on a 1/2-inch grid and have a depth of 1/16-inch.
d.PTFE sheet shall be recessed and chemically bonded to the supporting steel plate or bar, except that woven PTFE sheet shall be mechanically bonded to the supporting plate or bar. Bonding shall be performed In accordance with the PTFE manufacturer’s written procedure.
e.Following the bonding operation, the PTFE surface shall be smooth and free from bubbles. Filled PTFE shall be polished after the bonding operation is complete, in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
2.Stainless Steel Sheet:
a.The stainless steel sliding surface shall completely cover the PTFE surface in all operating positions plus one additional inch in all directions.
b.The stainless steel shall be 14-gage thick for the main sliding surfaces and 10- gage thick for the guide bars.
c.The stainless steel sheet shall be seal welded all around to the supporting steel plate or bar by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) process in accordance with current AWS specifications. The stainless steel sheet shall be clamped down to have full contact with the supporting steel plate or bar during welding. The welds shall not protrude beyond the sliding surface of the stainless steel sheet. Page 6-98 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresd. The curved surfaces of spherical bearings that receive stainless steel shall be

weld overlaid to produce a surface chemistry equivalent to ASTM A240 Type 304L or 316L stainless steel as shown in the Plans.

e.Stainless steel welded overlay on the curved surface of spherical bearings shall be a minimum of 3/32-inch thick after welding, grinding, and polishing.
3.Steel Plates and Bars:
a.Sole plates and masonry plates shall be 3/4-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
b.Each guide bar and keeper bar shall be fabricated from a single steel plate.
c.Guide bars and keeper bars shall be connected to the bearing assembly by recessing and bolting.
d.The stainless steel sheet shall be welded to the guide bar or keeper bar before attaching the bar to the bearing assembly.
e.The space between the guide bar or keeper bar and the guided component shall be 3/16-inch ± 1/16-inch.

6-02.3(19)C3 Non-HLMR Bearing Specific Fabrication Requirements

When the following components are shown in the Plans as part of the fabric pad bearing, pin bearing, or transverse stop bearing assembly, the following specific fabrication requirements shall apply:

1.PTFE Sheet:
a.PTFE shall be 1/8-inch, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. PTFE shall be recessed for a depth equal to one-half of its thickness into the material it is bonded to, with the exposed height of PTFE not less than 3/64-inch.
b.Dimpled PTFE, if shown in the Plans, shall be unfilled and shall have a maximum thickness of 3/16-inch. Dimples shall be placed on a 1/2-inch grid and have a depth of 1/16-inch.
c.PTFE sheet shall be recessed and chemically bonded to the supporting steel plate or bar, except that woven PTFE sheet shall be mechanically bonded to the supporting plate or bar. Bonding shall be performed in accordance with the PTFE manufacturer’s written procedure.
d.Following the bonding operation, the PTFE surface shall be smooth and free from bubbles. Filled PTFE shall be polished after the bonding operation is complete, in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications.
2.Stainless Steel Sheet:
a.The stainless steel sheet shall be seal welded all around to the supporting steel plate or bar by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) process in accordance with current AWS specifications.
b.The stainless steel sheet shall be clamped down to have full contact with the supporting steel plate or bar during welding.
c.The welds shall not protrude beyond the sliding surface of the stainless steel sheet.
3.Steel Plates and Bars:
a.Each guide bar and keeper bar shall be fabricated from a single steel plate.
b.Guide bars and keeper bars shall be connected to the bearing assembly by welding or bolting, as shown in the Plans. M 41-10 Page 6-99 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(19)D Corrosion Protection Steel surfaces, except as otherwise specified below, shall be painted in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9) , with a finish coat paint color as specified in Section 6-03.3(30) as supplemented in the Special Provisions. The surfaces of all welds fastening stainless steel to structural steel shall be painted as specified for structural steel. Stainless steel shall not be painted. Galvanized fastening hardware (anchor bolts, bolts, nuts, and washers) shall be painted in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)A . All coats of paint as specified in Section 6-07.3(9)A for steel surfaces shall be applied in the shop. After the bearing assembly has been erected in its final position with the anchor bolt nuts installed, all surfaces with damaged paint shall be repaired in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9)I . All coats of paint as specified in Section 6-07.3(11)A for galvanized fastening hardware shall be applied after the bearing assembly has been erected in its final position with the anchor bolt nuts installed and tightened. The Contractor shall prepare the galvanized surfaces for painting in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)A except only hand or power tool cleaning methods shall be used. The embedded pipe assembly of the bearing assembly anchorage, when shown in the Plans, shall not be painted. The following pin bearing components shall be painted only with one shop applied coat of inorganic zinc primer in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9) .
1.Keeper rings.
2.Keeper ring groove surface in the bearing blocks. The following pin bearing components and surfaces shall not be painted, but shall instead be coated with #2 extreme pressure grease:
1.Machined surfaces of the bearing blocks that contact the pin and keeper rings.
2.All surfaces of the pins.
3.All threads of the pin nuts. The primer paint coated keeper rings shall be coated with #2 extreme pressure grease prior to final bearing assembly.

6-02.3(19)E HLMR Bearing Testing

The Contractor shall provide for HLMR bearing testing. The testing shall be performed by the testing entity selected in accordance with Section 6-02.3(19)B6 . All testing performed by the bearing manufacturer shall be witnessed by the inspection entity performing the certified shop inspection of the bearings. Failure of the test bearing will result in rejection of all bearings. The testing requirements specified below may be waived provided:

1.The bearing manufacturer, through the Contractor, shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of certified test results from a previous installation of HLMR bearings of similar design and load capacity. This submittal shall accompany the design calculation submittal of Section 6-02.3(19)B1 and the fabrication shop plan submittal of Section 6-02.3(19)B3 .
2.The tests performed on the previously installed bearings satisfy the requirements specified below.
3.All test requirements performed on and not satisfied by the previously installed bearings shall be performed on and satisfied by a test bearing in this Contract through a disc bearing Proof Load test conforming to Section 6-02.3(19)E1 or a spherical bearing Wear and Damage Characteristics test conforming to Section 6-02.3(19)E2 , as appropriate. Page 6-100 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe test bearing may be used as a production bearing provided:

1.The test bearing passed the test.
2.The test bearing was selected from the production bearings.
3.All PTFE in the test bearing assembly shall be replaced with new PTFE.

6-02.3(19)E1 Disc Bearing Proof Load Testing

When fabrication of disc bearings is complete, a Proof Load test shall be performed either on disc bearing assemblies randomly selected from the production bearings, or an equal number of prototype bearings with a minimum design capacity of 400-kips. One disc bearing per lot shall be tested where one lot is defined as a maximum of 25-production bearings. The Proof Load test shall be performed on the selected test bearing assemblies as follows:

1.A proof load of 150-percent of the design capacity of the bearing shall be applied at the maximum design bearing rotation for a duration of five-minutes, removed, and then reapplied for five-minutes.
2.A bevel plate with a taper equal to the maximum design bearing rotation shall be used to simulate the specified bearing rotation.
3.After completing the specified load duration, the bearing shall be disassembled and inspected for wear and damage.
4.The test bearing shall show no signs of defects and failure while under load, and after disassembly and inspection.

6-02.3(19)E2 Spherical Bearing Wear and Damage Characteristics Testing

When fabrication of spherical bearings is complete, a Wear and Damage Characteristics test shall be performed on spherical bearing assemblies randomly selected from the production bearings. For bearings with a design capacity in excess of 1,000-kips, prototype bearings may be used for the Wear and Damage Characteristics test. One spherical bearing per lot shall be tested where one lot is defined as a maximum of 25-production bearings. The Wear and Damage Characteristic test shall be performed on the selected test bearing assemblies as follows:

1.The bearing shall be subjected to 5,000-cycles of rotation (2.0 degrees each direction from level, 4.0 degrees total rotation) under the specified vertical dead load plus live load.
2.After completing the load cycles, the bearing shall be disassembled and inspected for wear and damage. A 1/64-inch reduction in PTFE thickness, or damage to the bearing, shall be cause for rejection of the bearing assembly.
3.The test bearing shall show no signs of defects and failure while under load, and after disassembly and inspection.

6-02.3(19)F Bearing Inspection and Acceptance

Three levels of inspection shall be satisfied before the bearings are accepted. The manufacturer shall provide for both Quality Control and Quality Assurance Inspection in accordance with Section 6-02.3(19)F1 and 6-02.3(19)F2 . The manufacturer shall provide access for the Final Shop Inspection in accordance with Section 6-02.3(19)F3 . The bearings shall satisfy each of the three levels of inspection as specified below prior to acceptance. Bearings that fail any one of the three levels of inspection shall have the deficiencies addressed in accordance with Section 1-05.7 . All proposed corrective procedures shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. M 41-10 Page 6-101 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(19)F1 Quality Control Inspection During the fabrication process of all bearing assembly components and units, the manufacturer shall provide full time Quality Control Inspection to ensure that the materials and Work meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Contract. Quality Control Inspection shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer’s quality control group, which shall be independent of the fabrication group.

6-02.3(19)F2 Quality Assurance Inspection

Quality Assurance Inspection shall be performed by the independent inspection entity performing the certified shop inspection in accordance with Section 6-02.3(19)B5 . Quality Assurance Inspection is not required to be full time inspection, but shall be done at all phases of the manufacturing process. The frequency of inspection shall be included in the Quality Assurance Inspection Program.

6-02.3(19)F3 Final Shop Inspection

Prior to shipping the bearings to the job site, a randomly selected representative number of production bearings shall be inspected by the independent inspection entity at the manufacturer’s facility. The manufacturer shall provide a clean, dry, and enclosed area for the bearing inspection. The manufacturer shall disassemble and reassemble the bearings for inspection by the independent inspection entity. The independent inspection entity shall certify that the bearings have been inspected, and that the bearings have been manufactured in full compliance with the Contract requirements.

6-02.3(19)G Bearing Component Assembly, Shipping, and Storage

Each bearing, except bearing components welded to the bottom flange of steel girders or embedded into concrete superstructure, shall be fully assembled at the manufacturing plant and delivered to the construction site as a complete unit, ready for installation. The units shall be held together with removable restraints so that the sliding surfaces are not damaged. Softeners shall be placed under the restraints to protect all painted surfaces. The Contractor shall not damage the painted surfaces while shipping, storing and installing the bearing assemblies. All bearing assemblies shall be marked with the following information prior to shipping:

1.Location of the bearing, including the pier and the specific location along the pier.
2.Direction arrow pointing in the ahead-on-station direction. The above information shall be marked on the top plate of the upper unit of the bearing assembly. The marks shall be permanent and shall be visible after bearing installation. The bearing assemblies shall have centerlines marked on both upper and lower units for checking alignment in the field. The bearing assemblies shall be shipped in light-proof, moisture-proof and dust-proof containers.

6-02.3(19)H Bearing Assembly Field Inspection

The Contracting Agency may perform field inspection of bearing assemblies at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a clean, dry and enclosed area at the site, spacious enough for the field inspection activities. The Contractor shall disassemble and reassemble the bearings for inspection by the Engineer. The disassembly and reassembly of the bearings shall be in accordance with the bearing manufacturer’s written procedure and in the presence of the Engineer. Bearings that fail the field inspection shall have the deficiencies addressed in accordance with Section 1-05.7 . All proposed corrective procedures shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. Page 6-102 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(19)I Bearing Assembly Installation

The Contractor shall install the bearing assembly in accordance with the installation procedure included with the fabrication shop drawing submittal required by Sliding surfaces shall be finished true, lubricated, and installed level, or installed as shown in the Plans for transverse stop bearings. PTFE sheet shall not be greased, except as otherwise noted. A thin uniform film of silicone grease shall be applied to the entire dimpled PTFE sheet before installation (all dimples shall be filled with grease). For bearing assemblies with PTFE and stainless steel components, the Contractor shall take special care at all times to ensure protection of the PTFE and stainless steel surfaces from coming in contact with concrete and any other foreign matter. The grout pad, and masonry plate when shown in the Plans, shall be formed and placed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(20) , and installed level. The grout pad thickness shall be adjusted based on final bearing design dimensions, and to achieve final grade profile elevations as shown in the Plans. When shown with a masonry plate, the grout pad shall be pressure installed starting at the middle of the masonry plate. For cast-in-place concrete superstructures, the upper units of bearing assemblies shall be anchored to the superstructure as shown in the Plans. For steel and precast concrete superstructures, the uppermost unit of bearing assemblies shall be connected or anchored to the superstructure as shown in the Plans. When specified in the Plans for bearing assemblies supporting steel or precast concrete superstructure, the interface between the sole plate and the bridge superstructure (or the upper and lower sole plates when two separate components) shall be set with epoxy gel just before setting the superstructure in place. The (lower) sole plate surface in contact with the epoxy gel shall receive a thin uniform film of silicone grease, to prevent bonding to the epoxy gel. The threads of the sole plate clamping bolts shall be greased to prevent bonding and allow future removal. The Contractor shall apply the epoxy gel by troweling it onto the bottom surface of the steel girder flange or the upper sole plate welded to the steel girder flange and shall immediately bolt the (lower) sole plate in place to obtain a level surface. Before the epoxy gel has cured, the steel or precast concrete superstructure shall be set in place, squeezing out the excess epoxy gel while filling the interface between the steel surfaces. Excess epoxy and grease shall be removed immediately. After the epoxy gel has cured, the sole plate clamping bolts shall be tightened to snug tight. When the upper unit of the pin bearing consists of an upper bearing block welded to a sole plate, the top surface of the sole plate shall receive a thin uniform film of silicone grease, and the bolt threads connecting the pin assembly to the steel superstructure shall be greased, prior to fastening the sole plate to the steel superstructure. Specified surfaces of the bearing blocks, pins, and pin nuts shall be coated with grease as specified in Section 6-02.3(19)D . After installation, the orientation of the spherically curved units shall be ± 1/2 degree from level.

6-02.3(20) Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings

Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(2) for anchor bolts and for bearing assemblies with bearing plates. Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(3) for elastomeric bearing pads and fabric pad bearings without bearing plates. Grout shall be a workable mix with a viscosity that is suitable for the intended application. Grout shall not be placed outside of the manufacturer recommended range of thickness. The Contractor shall receive concurrence from the Engineer before using the grout. M 41-10 Page 6-103 Concrete Structures 6-02Field grout cubes and cylinders shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with Section 9-20.3 when requested by the Engineer, but not less than one per bridge pier or once per day. Before placing grout, the substrate on which it is to be placed shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure proper bonding. The grout shall be cured as recommended by the manufacturer. The grout may be loaded when a minimum of 4,000 psi compressive strength is attained. To grout bridge bearing masonry plates, the Contractor shall:

1.Build a form approximately 4 inches high with sides 4 inches outside the base of each masonry plate,
2.Fill each form to the top with grout,
3.Work grout under all parts of each masonry plate,
4.Remove each form after the grout has hardened,
5.Remove the grout outside each masonry plate to the base of the masonry plate,
6.Bevel off the grout neatly to the top of the masonry, and
7.Place no additional load on the masonry plate until the grout has set at least 72 hours. After all grout under the masonry plate and in the anchor bolt cavities has attained a minimum strength of 4,000 psi, the anchor bolt nuts shall be tightened to snug tight. “Snug tight” means either the tightness reached by (1) a few blows from an impact wrench, or (2) the full effort of a person using a spud wrench. Once the nut is snug tight, the anchor bolt threads shall be burred just enough to prevent loosening of the nut.

6-02.3(21) Drainage of Box Girder Cells

To drain box girder cells, the Contractor shall provide and install, according to details in the Plans, short lengths of nonmetallic pipe in the bottom slab at the low point of each cell. The pipe shall have a minimum inside diameter of 4 inches. If the difference in Plan elevation is 2 inches or less, the Contractor shall install pipe in each end of the box girder cell. All drainage holes shall be screened in accordance with the Plan details.

6-02.3(22) Drainage of Substructure

The Contractor shall use weep holes and gravel backfill that complies with Section

9-03.12(2) to drain fill material behind retaining walls, abutments, tunnels, and wingwalls.

To maintain thorough drainage, weep holes shall be placed as low as possible. Weep holes shall be covered with geotextile meeting the requirements of Section 9-33.2 , Table 2 Class C before backfilling. Geotextile screening shall be bonded to the concrete with an accepted adhesive. Gravel backfill shall be placed and compacted as required in Section

2-09.3(1)E In addition, if the Plans require, tiling, French or rock drains, or other drainage

devices shall be installed. If underdrains are not installed behind the wall or abutment, all backfill within 18 inches of weep holes shall comply with Section 9-03.12(4) . Unless the Plans require otherwise, all other backfill behind the wall or abutment shall be gravel backfill for walls.

6-02.3(23) Opening to Traffic

Bridges with a bridge deck made of concrete shall remain closed to all traffic, including construction equipment, until the concrete has reached the 28-day specified compressive strength. This strength shall be determined with cylinders made of the same concrete as the bridge deck and cured under the same conditions. A concrete deck bridge shall never be opened to traffic earlier than 10 days after the deck concrete was placed and never before the Engineer allows. Page 6-104 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresFor load restrictions on bridges under construction, refer to Section 6-01.6 .

After curing bridge approach slabs in accordance with Section 6-02.3(11) , the bridge approach slabs may be opened to traffic when a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi is achieved.

6-02.3(24) Reinforcement

Although a bar list is normally included in the Plans, the Contracting Agency does not guarantee its accuracy and it shall be used at the Contractor’s risk. Reinforcement fabrication details shall be determined from the information provided in the Plans. Before delivery of the reinforcing bars, the Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of an informational copy of the supplemental bending diagrams.

6-02.3(24)A Field Bending

Field bending of AASHTO M31 Grade 60 and ASTM A706 Grade 60 reinforcement shall be done in accordance with the requirements of this section. Field bending of all other reinforcement shall require a Type 2 Working Drawing showing the bend radii, bending and heating procedures, and all inspection or testing requirements. Field bending shall not be done on reinforcement within the top or bottom third of column lengths or within plastic hinge regions identified in the Plans. Field bending shall not be done on bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18. In field-bending steel reinforcing bars, the Contractor shall:

1.Make the bend gradually using a bending tool equipped with a bending diameter as listed in Table 1. Bending shall not be done by means of hammer blows and pipe sleeves. When bending to straighten a previously bent bar, move a hickey bar progressively around the bend.
2.Apply heat as described below for bending bar sizes No. 6 through No. 11 and for bending bar sizes No. 5 and smaller when the bars have been previously bent. Previously unbent bars of sizes No. 5 and smaller may be bent without heating when the bar temperature is 40°F or higher. When previously unbent bars of sizes No. 5 and smaller have a bar temperature lower than 40°F, they shall be heated to within the range of 100°F to 150°F prior to bending. In applying heat for field-bending steel reinforcing bars, the Contractor shall:
a.Avoid damage to the concrete by insulating concrete within 6 inches of the heated bar area;
b.Apply two heat tips simultaneously at opposite sides of bar sizes No. 7 or larger;
c.Heat the bar to within the required temperature range shown in Table 2 as verified by using temperature-indicating crayons or other suitable means;
d.Heat a minimum bar length as shown in Table 3. Locate the heated section of the bar to include the entire bending length;
e.Bend immediately after the required temperature range has been achieved. Maintain the bar within the required temperature range during the entire bending process;
f.Do not cool bars artificially with water, forced air, or other means.
3.Limit bends or straightening to these maximum angles: 135 degrees for bar sizes No. 8 or smaller, and 90 degrees for bar sizes No. 9 through No. 11. M 41-10 Page 6-105 Concrete Structures 6-024. Repair epoxy coating on epoxy coated bars in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)H . Table 1 Bending Diameters for Field-Bending Reinforcing Bars Bar SizeBend Diameter/Bar Diameter Ratio Heat Not Applied Heat Applied No. 4, No. 5 8 8 No. 6 through No. 9 Not Permitted 8 No. 10, No. 11 Not Permitted 10 The minimum bending diameters for stirrups and ties for No. 4 and No. 5 bars when heat is not applied shall be specified in Section 9-07 . Table 2 Preheating Temperatures for Field-Bending Reinforcing Bars Bar SizeTemperature (F) Minimum Maximum No. 4 1,200 1,250 No. 5, No. 6 1,350 1,400 No. 7 through No. 9 1,400 1,450 No. 10, No. 11 1,450 1,500 Table 3 Minimum Bar Length to be Heated (d = nominal diameter of bar) Bar SizeBend Angle 45° 90° 135° No. 4 through No. 8 8d 12d 15d No. 9 8d 12d Not Permitted No. 10, No. 11 9d 14d Not Permitted

6-02.3(24)B Protection of Materials

The Contractor shall protect reinforcing steel from all damage. When placed into the Structure, the steel shall be free from dirt, loose rust or mill scale, paint, oil, and other foreign matter. When transporting, storing, or constructing in close proximity to bodies of salt water, plain and epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar shall be kept in enclosures that provide protection from the elements. If plain or epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar is exposed to mist, spray, or fog that may contain salt, it shall be flushed with fresh water prior to concrete placement. When the Engineer requires protection for reinforcing steel that will remain exposed for a length of time, the Contractor shall protect the reinforcing steel:

1.By cleaning and applying a coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B over all exposed surfaces of steel, or
2.By cleaning and painting paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B on the first 6 inches of the steel bars protruding from the concrete and covering the bars with polyethylene sleeves. The paint shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil. Epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars shall not be exposed to environmental conditions for a cumulative duration exceeding 60 days on site prior to full embedment in concrete. All provisions made to protect the reinforcing bars shall provide suitable protection from ultraviolet radiation including light and allow adequate ventilation to minimize condensation. Page 6-106 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(24)C Placing and Fastening

The Contractor shall position reinforcing steel as the Plans require and shall ensure that the steel is set within specified tolerances. Adjustments to reinforcing details outside of specified tolerances to avoid interferences and for other purposes are acceptable when approved by the Engineer. When spacing between bars is 1 foot or more, they shall be tied at all intersections. When spacing is less than 1 foot, every other intersection shall be tied. If the Plans require bundled bars, they shall be tied together with wires at least every 6 feet. All epoxy-coated bars in the top mat of the bridge deck shall be tied at all intersections, however they may be tied at alternate intersections when spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction and they are supported by continuous supports meeting all other requirements of supports for epoxy-coated bars. Other epoxy-coated bars shall also be tied at all intersections, but shall be tied at alternate intersections when spacing is less than 1 foot in each direction. Wire used for tying epoxy-coated reinforcing steel shall be plastic coated. Tack welding is not permitted on reinforcing steel. Abrupt bends in the steel are permitted only when one steel member bends around another. Vertical stirrups shall pass around main reinforcement or be firmly attached to it. For slip-formed concrete, the reinforcing steel bars shall be tied at all intersections and cross braced to keep the cage from moving during concrete placement. Cross bracing shall be with additional reinforcing steel. Cross bracing shall be placed both longitudinally and transversely. After reinforcing steel bars are placed in a traffic or pedestrian barrier and prior to slip-form concrete placement, the Contractor shall check clearances and reinforcing steel bar placement. This check shall be accomplished by using a template or by operating the slip-form machine over the entire length of the traffic or pedestrian barrier. All clearance and reinforcing steel bar placement deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor before slip-form concrete placement. Precast concrete supports (or other accepted devices) shall be used to maintain the concrete coverage required by the Plans. The precast concrete supports shall:

1.Have a bearing surface measuring not greater than 2 inches in each dimension, and
2.Have a compressive strength equal to or greater than that of the concrete in which they are embedded. In slabs, each precast concrete support shall have either: (1) a grooved top that will hold the reinforcing bar in place, or (2) an embedded wire that protrudes and is tied to the reinforcing steel. If this wire is used around epoxy-coated bars, it shall be coated with plastic. Precast concrete supports may be accepted based on a Certificate of Compliance. For precast concrete supports, the supplier’s Certificate of Compliance or Contractor’s Certificate of Compliance shall be on company letterhead, specifying the Contract Agency number, Contract title, the material being certified, the WSDOT Standards or Specifications being affirmed, and signed and dated by the company official. In lieu of precast concrete supports, the Contractor may use metal or all-plastic supports to hold uncoated bars. Surfaces of metal chair supports that will not be covered by at least ½ inch of concrete shall be one of the following:
1.Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in keeping with AASHTO M232 Class D;
2.Coated with plastic firmly bonded to the metal. This plastic shall be at least 3/32 inch thick where it touches the form and shall not react chemically with the concrete when tested in the State Materials Laboratory. The plastic shall not shatter or crack at or above -5°F and shall not deform enough to expose the metal at or below 200°F; or M 41-10 Page 6-107 Concrete Structures 6-023. Stainless steel that meet the requirements of ASTM A493, Type 302. Stainless steel chair supports are not required to be galvanized or plastic coated. In lieu of precast concrete supports, epoxy-coated reinforcing bars may be supported by one of the following:
1.Metal supports coated entirely with a dielectric material such as epoxy or plastic,
2.Other epoxy-coated reinforcing bars, or
3.All-plastic supports. Damaged coatings on metal bar supports shall be repaired prior to placing concrete. All-plastic supports shall be lightweight, non-porous, and chemically inert in concrete. All-plastic supports shall have rounded seatings, shall not deform under load during normal temperatures, and shall not shatter or crack under impact loading in cold weather. All-plastic supports shall be placed at spacings greater than 1 foot along the bar and shall have at least 25 percent of their gross place area perforated to compensate for the difference in the coefficient of thermal expansion between plastic and concrete. The shape and configuration of all-plastic supports shall permit complete concrete consolidation in and around the support. A “mat” is two adjacent and perpendicular layers of reinforcing steel. In bridge decks, top and bottom mats shall be supported adequately enough to hold both in their proper positions. If bar supports directly support, or are directly supported on No. 4 bars, they shall be spaced at not more than 3-foot intervals (or not more than 4-foot intervals for bars No. 5 and larger). Wire ties to girder stirrups shall not be considered as supports. To provide a rigid mat, the Contractor shall add other supports and tie wires to the top mat as needed. Unless noted otherwise, the minimum concrete cover for main reinforcing bars shall be: 3 inches to a concrete surface deposited against earth without intervening forms. 2½ inches to the top surface of a concrete bridge deck or bridge approach slab. 2 inches to a concrete surface when not specified otherwise in this section or in the Contract documents. 1½ inches to a concrete barrier or curb surface. Except for top cover in bridge decks and bridge approach slabs, minimum concrete cover to ties and stirrups may be reduced by ½ inch but shall not be less than 1 inch. Minimum concrete cover shall also be provided to the outermost part of mechanical splices and headed steel reinforcing bars. Reinforcing steel bar location, concrete cover, and clearance shall not vary more than the following tolerances from what is specified in the Contract documents: Reinforcing bar location for members 12 inches or less in thickness: ±0.25 inch Reinforcing bar location for members greater than 12 inches in thickness: ±0.375 inch Reinforcing bar location for bars placed at equal spacing within a plane: the greater of either ±1 inch or ±1 bar diameter within the plane. The total number of bars shall not be fewer than that specified. The clearance between reinforcement shall not be less than the greater of the bar diameter or 1 inch for unbundled bars. For bundled bars, the clearance between bundles shall not be less than the greater of 1 inch or a bar diameter derived from the equivalent total area of all bars in the bundle. Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: ±1 inch Page 6-108 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresEmbedded length of bars and length of bar lap splices:

No 3 through No. 11 -1 in. No. 14 through No. 18 -2 in. Concrete cover measured perpendicular to concrete surface (except for the top surface of bridge decks, bridge approach slabs and other roadway surfaces): ±0.25 inch Concrete cover measured perpendicular to concrete surface for the top surface of bridge decks, bridge approach slabs and other roadway surfaces: +0.25 inch, -0 inch Before placing concrete, the Contractor shall:

1.Clean all mortar from reinforcement, and
2.Obtain the Engineer’s permission to place concrete after the Engineer has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel. (Concrete placed without the Engineer’s permission will be rejected and the Contractor shall remove.)

6-02.3(24)D Splicing

The Contractor shall supply steel reinforcing bars in the full lengths the Plans require. Unless the Engineer concurs in writing, the Contractor shall not change the number, type, or location of splices. The Engineer may permit the Contractor to use thermal or mechanical splices in place of the method shown in the Plans if they are of an accepted design. Use of a new design may be granted if:

1.The Contractor provides technical data and proof from the manufacturer that the design will perform satisfactorily, and
2.Sample splices and materials from the manufacturer pass the Engineer’s tests. The Contractor shall:
1.Not lap-splice reinforcing bars Nos. 14 or 18.
2.Not permit a welded or mechanical splice to deviate in alignment more than ¼ inch per 3½ feet of bar.
3.Distribute splices evenly, grouping them together only at points of low tensile stress.
4.Ensure at least 2 inches clearance between a splice and the nearest bar or the surface of the concrete (or 1½ inch for the length of the sleeve on mechanical splices).
5.Rigidly clamp or wire all splices in a way accepted by the Engineer.
6.Place lap-spliced bars in contact for the length of the splice and tie them together near each end.
7.Securely fasten the ends and edges of welded-wire-fabric reinforcement, overlapping them enough to maintain even strength.

6-02.3(24)D1 Splicing of Hoop Reinforcement for Columns and Shafts

When the Plans show steel reinforcement bar hoops, the hoops shall be spliced by one of the following methods:

1.Resistance butt weld splice, welded in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)I .
2.Welded direct butt splice, welded in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)J .
3.Welded lap splice if shown in the Plans, welded in accordance with All welded splices of hoop reinforcement shall be welded in the shop. M 41-10 Page 6-109 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(24)E Welding Reinforcing Steel Welding of steel reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel, latest edition, except where superseded by the Special Provisions, Plans, and these Specifications. Before welding begins, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the welding procedure for each type of welded splice to be used, including the weld procedure specifications and joint details. The weld procedure specifications shall be written on a form taken from AWS D1.4 Annex A, or equivalent. Test results of tensile strength, macroetch, and visual examination shall be included. The form shall be signed and dated. Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing and qualification of welders, and shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of welder qualification and retention records. The weld joint and welding position a welder is qualified in shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4. The welder qualifications shall remain in effect indefinitely unless, (1) the welder is not engaged in a given process of welding for which the welder is qualified for a period exceeding 6 months, or (2) there is some specific reason to question a welder’s ability. Filler metals used for welding reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 Table 5.1. All filler metals shall be low-hydrogen and handled in compliance with low-hydrogen practices specified in the AWS code. Short circuiting transfer with gas metal arc welding will not be allowed. Slugging of welds will not be allowed. For the purpose of compatibility with AWS D1.4, welded lap splices for spiral or hoop reinforcing shall be considered Flare-V groove welds, indirect butt joints. The Contractor is responsible for using a welding sequence that will limit the alignment distortion of the bars due to the effects of welding. The maximum out-of-line permitted will be ¼ inch from a 3.5-foot straightedge centered on the weld and in line with the bar. The ground wire from the welding machine shall be clamped to the bar being welded. Where epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars are specified to be spliced by welding, the epoxy coating shall be left off or removed from the surfaces to be heated, but in no cases less than six inches of each bar being welded. After the welding is complete, the Contractor shall apply epoxy patching material to the uncoated portions of the bar in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)H .

6-02.3(24)F Mechanical Splices

The Contractor shall form mechanical splices with an Engineer-accepted system using sleeve filler metal, threaded coupling, or another method that complies with this section. If necessary to maintain required clearances after the splices are in place, the Contractor shall adjust, relocate, or add stirrups, ties, and bars. Before splicing, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information for each shipment of splice material:

1.The type or series identification (and heat treatment lot number for threaded-sleeve splices),
2.The grade and size of bars to be spliced,
3.A manufacturer’s catalog with complete data on material and procedures,
4.A written statement from the manufacturer that the material is identical to that used earlier by the Engineer in testing and accepting the system design, and
5.A written statement from the Contractor that the system and materials will be used according to the manufacturer’s instructions and all requirements of this section. Page 6-110 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresAll splices shall meet these criteria:

1.Mechanical splices shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the unspliced bar. The ultimate tensile strength of the mechanical splice shall exceed that of the unspliced bar.
2.The total slip of the bar within the spliced sleeve of the connector after loading in tension to 30.0 ksi and relaxing to 3.0 ksi shall not exceed the following measured displacements between gage points clear of the splice sleeve:
a.0.01 inches for bar sizes up to No. 14.
b.0.03 inches for No. 18 bars.
3.The maximum allowable bar size for mechanical laps splices shall be No. 6. The Engineer will visually inspect the splices and accept all that appear to conform with the test samples. For sleeve-filler splices, the Engineer will allow voids within the limits on file in the Working Drawing design submittal. If the Engineer considers a splice defective, it shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. In preparing sleeve-filler metal splices, the Contractor shall:
1.Clean the bar surfaces by: (a) oxyacetylene torch followed by power wire brushing, or
b.abrasive blasting;
2.Remove all slag, mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter from all surfaces within and 2 inches beyond the sleeve;
3.Grind down projections on the bar that would prevent placing the sleeve;
4.Prepare the ends of the bars as the splice manufacturer recommends and as the accepted procedure requires; and
5.Preheat, just before adding the filler, the entire sleeve and bar ends to 300°F, plus or minus 50°F. (If a gas torch is used, the flame shall not be directed into the sleeve.) When a metallic, sleeve-filler splice is used (or any other system requiring special equipment), both the system and the operator shall qualify in the following way under the supervision of the State Materials and Fabrication Inspector. The operator shall prepare six test splices (three vertical, three horizontal) using bars having the same AASHTO Designation and size (maximum) as those to be used in the Work. Each test sample shall be 6 foot plus the length of the splice. The bar alignment shall not deviate more than ⅛ inch from a straight line over the whole length of the sample. All six samples must meet the tensile strength and slip criteria specified in this section. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials, and equipment for making these test samples at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will test the samples at no cost to the Contractor.

6-02.3(24)G Job Control Tests

As the Work progresses, the Engineer may require the Contractor to provide a sample splice (thermal or mechanical) to be used in a job control test. The operator shall create this sample on the job site with the Engineer present using bars of the same size as those being spliced in the Work. The sample shall comply with all requirements of these Specifications and is in addition to all other sample splices required for qualification. The Engineer will require no more than two samples on a project with fewer than 200 splices and no more than one sample per 100 splices on a project with more than 200 splices. M 41-10 Page 6-111 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(24)H Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bar This Work is furnishing, fabricating, coating, and placing epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars as the Plans, these Specifications, and the Special Provisions require. Coating material shall be applied electrostatically, by spraying, or by the fluidized-bed method. All epoxy-coated bars shall comply with the requirements of Section 9-07 . Fabrication may occur before or after coating. The Contractor shall protect epoxy-coated bars from damage using padded or nonmetallic slings and straps free from dirt or grit. To prevent abrasion from bending or sagging, the Contractor shall lift bundled bars with a strong-back, multiple supports, or a platform bridge. Bundled bars shall not be dropped or dragged. During shop or field storage, bars shall rest on wooden or padded cribbing. The Contractor may substitute other methods for protecting the bars if the Engineer concurs. If the Engineer believes the coated bars have been badly damaged, they will be rejected. Metal chairs and supports shall be coated with epoxy (or another inert coating accepted by the Engineer). The Contractor may use other support devices with the Engineer’s concurrence. Plastic coated tie wires (accepted by the Engineer) shall be used to protect the coated bars from being damaged during placement. The bars shall be placed as the Plans require and held firmly in place during placing and setting of the concrete. All bars shall be placed and fastened as specified in In the interval between installing coated bars and concreting the deck, the Contractor shall protect the coating from damage that might result from other construction Work. The Engineer will inspect the coated bars after they are placed and before the deck concrete is placed. The Contractor shall patch all areas that show significant damage (as defined below). Significant damage means an opening in the coating that exposes the steel in an area that exceeds:

1.0.05 square inch (approximately ¼ inch square or ¼ inch in diameter or the equivalent).
2.0.012 square inches (approximately ⅛ inch square or ⅛ inch in diameter) when the opening is within ¼ inch of another opening of equal or larger size.
3.6 inches long, any width.
4.0.50 square inch aggregate area in a 1 foot length of bar. The Contractor shall patch significantly damaged areas with a patching material obtained from the epoxy resin manufacturer and accepted by the Engineer. This material shall be compatible with the coating and inert in concrete. Areas to be patched shall be clean and free of surface contaminants. Patching shall be done before oxidation occurs and according to the resin manufacturer’s instructions.

6-02.3(24)I Resistance Butt Weld Splicing of Hoop Reinforcement for Columns and

Shafts

6-02.3(24)I1 Splicing Quality Control Manager

The Contractor shall designate in writing a Splicing Quality Control Manager (SQCM). The SQCM shall be responsible for the quality of all hoop reinforcement splicing, including the inspection of materials and quality of Work, and submitting, receiving, and approving all correspondence, required submittals, and reports regarding hoop reinforcement splicing to and from the Engineer. Page 6-112 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.3(24)I2 Splice Sample Test Facilities

Qualification testing and testing of production sample splices shall be performed at an independent qualified testing laboratory at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. The laboratory shall have the following:

1.Proper facilities, including a tensile testing machine capable of breaking full-size samples of all steel reinforcing bar splices.
2.Operators who have received documented training for performing the testing requirements of ASTM A370.
3.A record of annual calibration of testing equipment performed by an independent third party that has standards that are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and a formal reporting procedure, including published test forms. Calibration records shall be made available for the Engineer’s review upon request.

6-02.3(24)I3 Splice Qualification Report

The Contractor shall submit a Splice Qualification Report as a Type 2 Working Drawing. This report shall include, at a minimum:

1.Name of the designated Splicing Quality Control Manager (SQCM).
2.Splice material information
3.Names of the operators who will be performing the splicing
4.Descriptions of the positions, locations, equipment, and procedures that will be used in the splice work.
5.Fabricator’s Quality Control Manual for the fabrication of hoops including, but not be limited to, the following:
a.The pre-production procedures for the qualification of material and equipment.
b.The methods and frequencies for performing quality control procedures during production.
c.The calibration procedures and calibration frequency for all equipment.
d.The welding procedure specification for resistance welding.
e.The method for identifying and tracking lots.
6.Certifications from the fabricator for qualifications of operators and procedures based on sample qualification tests performed within the past 24 months of the date of the Splice Qualification Report submittal.
a.Each operator shall be certified by performing two sample splices for each bar size of each splice type that the operator will be performing in the work.
7.Certified test results for all qualification sample splices, tested by an independent qualified testing laboratory and conforming to the specified production test criteria.

6-02.3(24)I4 Production Control Splice Test Criteria

For the purpose of hoop reinforcement splice testing, a lot of splices are defined as 200, or a fraction thereof, of the same type of splice for each bar diameter that is used in the work. A production control sample shall consist of four splices removed from each lot of completed splices. The Contractor shall select the splices comprising the lot. The Engineer will, or the SQCM shall if the Engineer is not available, select the product control sample of four splices to be tested from each lot. Production control testing shall be performed for all hoop reinforcement splices used in the work. Production control samples shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A370. M 41-10 Page 6-113 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(24)I5 Sample Test Criteria After the splices in a lot have been completed, the SQCM shall notify the Engineer in writing that the splices in this lot conform to the specifications and are ready for testing. At least one week before sample testing, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer by a Type 1 Working Drawing of the date and location of the testing to allow the Engineer the opportunity to witness the testing. Samples shall achieve at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar. In addition, either necking of the bar or a plateau of the stress-strain curve shall be evident at rupture.

6-02.3(24)I6 Sample Acceptance Criteria

If all four sample splices from a lot conform to the requirements of Section 6-02.3(24)I5 , all splices in the lot represented by the test will be considered acceptable. If only two or three of the four sample splices from a lot conform to the requirements of Section 6-02.3(24)I5 , the Engineer will, or the SQCM shall if the Engineer is not available, select an additional set of four samples for re-test from the same lot of splices. Should any of the four sample splices from this additional test fail to conform to these requirements; all splices in the lot will be rejected. Should only one sample splice from a lot conform to the requirements of Whenever a lot of splices are rejected, the rejected lot and subsequent lots of splices shall not be used in the work until the following requirements are met:

1.The SQCM performs a complete review of the Contractor’s quality control process for these splices.
2.A written report is submitted to the Engineer describing the cause of the failure of the splices in this lot and provisions for preventing similar failures in future lots.
3.The Engineer has provided the Contractor with written notification that the report and corrective actions are acceptable. All bars within a lot shall be visually inspected to verify bar offset at the joint doesn’t exceed what is permitted in ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018 Section 6.2.1. All splices with offsets exceeding those as specified in ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018 Section 6.2.1 will be rejected.

6-02.3(24)I7 Reporting Test Results

A Production Control Test Report for all testing performed on each lot shall be prepared by the independent testing laboratory performing the testing and submitted to the SQCM. The report shall include the following information for each test:

1.Contract number.
2.Dates received and tested.
3.Lot number.
4.Bar diameter, hoop diameter, and bar length.
5.Type of splice.
6.Length of test specimen.
7.Physical condition of the test sample splice and description of break and location in relation to splice.
8.Any noticeable defects.
9.Ultimate tensile strength of each splice. Page 6-114 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresThe SQCM shall review, approve with a signature, and submit each Production Control

Test Report as a Type 2 Working Drawing. The Contractor shall not encase the splices represented by the report in concrete until receiving the Engineer’s written response to the submittal.

6-02.3(24)J Welded Direct Butt Splicing of Hoop Reinforcement for Columns and

Shafts

6-02.3(24)J1 Splicing Quality Control Manager

The Contractor shall designate a Splicing Quality Control Manager (SQCM) responsible for the quality control of all hoop reinforcement splicing. The SQCM shall be responsible for preparing all required submittals and reports regarding hoop reinforcement splicing. Prior to performing any production hoop splicing Work, the Contractor shall submit a Hoop Splicing Quality Control Plan as a Type 2 Working drawing, which shall include the following:

1.Identifying the SQCM. If the SQCM is not a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI), identifying the CWI(s) to be performing all the required inspections
2.Weld Procedure Specification (WPS) and all supporting qualification documents in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018
3.Welder qualifications in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018.
4.The name of the company and the inspector who will perform the radiographic examinations Each welder working on production hoop splices shall perform welder qualifications regardless of previous experience or qualification. The WPS and welder qualifications shall be witnessed by a CWI. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to performing qualification testing to provide the Engineer the opportunity to witness.

6-02.3(24)J2 Welded Direct Butt Splices

Welded direct butt splices shall be complete joint penetration butt welds conforming to ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018 figure 5.2. Split pipe backing shall not be used. Thermite welding is not allowed.

6-02.3(24)J3 Nondestructive Splice Tests

All splices, including joint geometry and fit-up, in process welding, and completed welds shall be 100 percent visually inspected by the CWI(s) accepted in the hoop Splicing Quality Control Plan. The SQCM shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing with results of all visual inspections. Radiographic examinations shall be performed on 25 percent of all complete joint penetration butt welded splices from a lot defined as 200, or a fraction thereof, of the same type of splice for each bar diameter that is used in the work. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 48 hours before performing radiographic examinations. All required radiographic examinations shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M:2018 and as specified below. Before radiographic examination, welds shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M Section 6.4. Radiographic acceptance shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M Table 6.1. Acceptance criteria for bar size #7 shall be the same as for bar size #8. Should more than 12 percent of the splices which have been radiographically examined in any lot be defective, an additional 25 percent of the splices from the same lot, selected by the Engineer, or by the SQCM if the Engineer is not available, shall be radiographically M 41-10 Page 6-115 Concrete Structures 6-02examined. Should more than 12 percent of the cumulative total of splices tested from the same lot be defective, all remaining splices in the lot shall be radiographically examined. All defects shall be repaired in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4/D1.4M, latest edition. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 48 hours before performing any radiographic examinations. The radiographic procedure used shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.1, ANSI/AWS D1.4/ D1.4M:2018 Section 9.9, and the following:

1.Two exposures shall be made for each splice. For each of the two exposures, the radiation source shall be centered on each bar to be radiographed. The first exposure shall be made with the radiation source placed at zero degrees from the top of the weld and perpendicular to the weld root and identified with a station mark of “0”. The second exposure shall be at 90 degrees to the “0” station mark and shall be identified with a station mark of “90”. When obstructions prevent a 90 degree placement of the radiation source for the second exposure, and when approved in writing by the Engineer, the source may be rotated, around the centerline of the steel reinforcing bar, a maximum of 25 degrees.
2.If more than one weld is to be radiographed during one exposure, the angle between the root line of each weld and the direction to the radiation source shall not be less than 65 degrees.
3.Radiographs shall be made by either X-ray or gamma ray. Radiographs made by X-ray or gamma rays shall have densities of not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.5 in the area of interest. A tolerance of 0.05 in density is allowed for densitometer variations. Gamma rays shall be from the iridium 192 isotope and the emitting specimen shall not exceed 0.18 inches in the greatest diagonal dimension.
4.The radiographic film shall be placed perpendicular to the radiation source at all times; parallel to the root line of the weld unless source placement determines that the film shall be turned; and as close to the root of the weld as possible.
5.The minimum source to film distance shall be maintained so as to ensure that all radiographs maintain a maximum geometric unsharpness of 0.020 at all times, regardless of the size of the steel reinforcing bars.
6.Penetrameters shall be placed on the source side of the bar and perpendicular to the radiation source at all times. One penetrameter shall be placed in the center of each bar to be radiographed, perpendicular to the weld root, and adjacent to the weld. Penetrameter images shall not appear in the weld area.
7.When radiography of more than one weld is being performed per exposure, each exposure shall have a minimum of one penetrameter per bar, or three penetrameters per exposure. When three penetrameters per exposure are used, one penetrameter shall be placed on each of the two outermost bars of the exposure, and the remaining penetrameter shall be placed on a centrally located bar.
8.An allowable weld buildup of 0.16 inch may be added to the total material thickness when determining the proper penetrameter selection. No image quality indicator equivalency will be accepted. Wire penetrameters or penetrameter blocks shall not be used.
9.Penetrameters shall be sufficiently shimmed using a radiographically identical material. Penetrameter image densities shall be a minimum of 2.0 and a maximum of 3.6.
10.Radiographic film shall be Class 1, regardless of the size of the steel reinforcing bars. Page 6-116 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures11. Radiographs shall be free of film artifacts and processing defects, including, but

not limited to, streaks, scratches, pressure marks or marks made for the purpose of identifying film or welding indications.

12.Each splice shall be identified on each radiograph and the radiograph identification and marking system shall be established between the Contractor and the Engineer before radiographic inspection begins. Film shall be identified by lead numbers only; etching, flashing or writing in identifications of any kind will not be permitted. Each piece of film identification information shall be legible and shall include, as a minimum, the following information:
a.The Contractor’s name.
b.The name of the nondestructive testing firm.
c.Contract number.
d.Date of the test.
e.Initials of the radiographer.
f.Part number.
g.Weld number. The letter “R” and repair number shall be placed directly after the weld number to designate a radiograph of a repaired weld.
13.Radiographic film shall be developed within a time range of one minute less to one minute more than the film manufacturer’s recommended maximum development time. Sight development will not be allowed.
14.Processing chemistry shall be done with a consistent mixture and quality, and processing rinses and tanks shall be clean to ensure proper results. Records of all developing processes and chemical changes to the developing processes shall be kept and furnished to the Engineer upon request. The Engineer may request, at any time, that a sheet of unexposed film be processed in the presence of the Engineer to verify processing chemical and rinse quality.
15.The results of all radiographic interpretations shall be recorded on a signed certification and a copy kept with the film packet. Technique sheets prepared in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Section V Article 2 Section T-291 shall also contain the developer temperature, developing time, fixing duration and all rinse times. The Contractor shall maintain the radiographs and the radiographic inspection report(s) in the shop until the Engineer reviews them or requests copies. If the Engineer reviews them in the shop then the film and reports shall be released to the Engineer for permanent record keeping at that time. If copies are requested, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the film and a PDF or two paper copies of the radiographic inspection report. Adequate facilities and equipment shall be provided the Engineer for examining film, if performed in the shop. If the Engineer has not reviewed the film and reports in the shop or requested copies within ten working days of completion of the lot, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the film and reports.

6-02.3(24)K Welded Lap Splicing of Hoop Reinforcement for Shafts

All production splices shall be 100 percent visually inspected for weld quality, size and length. M 41-10 Page 6-117 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(25) Prestressed Concrete Girders Precast concrete girders shall be constructed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(9) , except as modified in this section. The manufacturing facility of prestressed concrete girders shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute’s Plant Certification Program for the type of prestressed member to be produced and shall be approved by WSDOT as a Certified Prestress Concrete Fabricator prior to the start of production. WSDOT certification will be granted at, and renewed during, the annual prestressed plant review and approval process in accordance with WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01.04 Standard Practice QC 6. The Contracting Agency intends to perform Quality Assurance Inspection. By its inspection, the Contracting Agency intends only to facilitate the Work and verify the quality of that Work. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for identifying and replacing defective material or Work. The various types of prestressed concrete girders are: Prestressed Concrete I Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder with a flanged I shaped cross section, requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series W42G, W50G, W58G, and W74G. Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange I Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder with an I shaped cross section with wide top and bottom flanges, requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series WF36G, WF42G, WF50G, WF58G, WF66G, WF74G, WF83G, WF95G, and WF100G. Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange Deck Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete wide flange I girder with extended top flange widths designed to support traffic loads, and designed to be mechanically connected at the flange edges to adjacent girders at the job site. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series WF39DG, WF45DG, WF53DG, WF61DG, WF69DG, WF77DG, WF86DG, WF98DG, and WF103DG. Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange Thin Deck Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete wide flange I girder with extended top flange widths requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads. Flange edges extend to flange edges of adjacent girders at the job site. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series WF36TDG, WF42TDG, WF50TDG, WF58TDG, WF66TDG, WF74TDG, WF83TDG, WF95TDG, and WF100TDG. Prestressed Concrete Deck Bulb Tee Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder with a top flange designed to support traffic loads, and designed to be mechanically connected at the flange edges to adjacent girders at the job site. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series W35DG, W41DG, W53DG, and W65DG. Prestressed Concrete Slab Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete slab girder, with or without voids. Prestressed concrete ribbed section girders and prestressed concrete double tee girders shall conform to the requirements specified for prestressed concrete slab girders. Prestressed Concrete Tub Girder – Refers to prestressed concrete tub girders with a U shaped cross section, requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads. WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series U**G* or Series UF**G*, where U specifies webs without top flanges, UF specifies webs with top flanges, ** specifies the girder height in inches, and * specifies the bottom flange width in feet. Spliced Prestressed Concrete Girder – Refers to prestressed concrete girders initially fabricated in segments which are longitudinally spliced together with cast-in-place concrete closures and post tensioning. Post tensioning materials and construction shall Page 6-118 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structuresconform to Section 6-02.3(26) , except that ducts for prestressed concrete wide flange

I girders may be 24-gage, semi-rigid, galvanized, corrugated, ferrous metal. WSDOT prestressed concrete wide flange I girders in this category include Series WF74PTG, WF83PTG, WF95PTG, and WF100PTG. WSDOT prestressed concrete tub girders in this category include Series U**PTG* and UF**PTG* where U, UF, **, and * are as defined for prestressed concrete tub girders.

6-02.3(25)A Shop Drawings

Shop drawings for prestressed concrete girders shall be submitted as Type 2 Working Drawings. The only deviations to the Plans that will be permitted are those approved by the annual plant approval process and those listed below:

1.Addition of inserts for construction purposes including falsework.
2.Small penetrations no larger than 1-inch diameter for construction purposes including overhang bracket supports, deck formwork hangers and temporary girder bracing. Penetrations in top flanges shall be offset from the edge of the flange the minimum distance shown in the Plans.
3.Small penetrations no larger than 2-inch in diameter for girder shipping tie-downs.
4.Small adjustments in girder length to account for elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage
5.Strand adjustments, as long as the center of gravity of the strands remains at the location shown in the plans and concrete cover is not reduced.
6.Diaphragm web hole vertical adjustments to avoid harped strands.
7.Substitution of welded wire reinforcement for conventional reinforcing steel. Shop drawings shall show the size and location of all inserts and penetrations. Penetrations for deck formwork and falsework shall match the deck formwork Working Drawings. Field-drilled holes in prestressed concrete girders are not allowed. Deformed welded wire reinforcement conforming to Sections 9-07.7 and 9-07.8 may be substituted for the mild steel reinforcement shown in the plans. The substitution shall be submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification requirements (latest edition including interims) shall be satisfied, including at a minimum the following Articles: 5.8.2.6 Types of Transverse Reinforcement 5.8.2.8 Design and Detailing Requirements 5.10.3 Spacing of Reinforcement 5.10.6.3 Ties 5.10.7 Transverse Reinforcement for Flexural Members 5.10.8 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement 5.10.10 Pretensioned Anchorage Zones 5.11.2.5 Welded Wire Fabric 5.11.2.6.3 Anchorage of Wire Fabric Reinforcement 5.11.6 Splices of Welded Wire Fabric Yield strengths in excess of 75.0 ksi shall not be used for welded wire reinforcement. The spacing of vertical welded wire reinforcement within slabs and girder webs shall not exceed 18 inches or the height of the member minus 3 inches, whichever is less. Longitudinal wires and welds are permitted in girder flanges but shall be excluded from girder webs. For vertical welded wire reinforcement in prestressed concrete slab girders, no welded joints other than those required for anchorage shall be permitted. Epoxy- M 41-10 Page 6-119 Concrete Structures 6-02coated wire and welded wire reinforcement shall conform to Section 9-07.3 with the exception that ASTM A884 Class A Type I shall be used instead of ASTM A775. Shop drawings for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall also conform to Section

6-02.3(26)A The Working Drawings for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall

include all details related to the post-tensioning operations in the field, including details of hardware required, tendon geometry, blockout details, and details of additional or modified steel reinforcing bars required in cast-in-place closures.

6-02.3(25)B Prestressing

Each stressing system shall have a pressure gauge or load cell that will measure jacking force. The gauge shall display pressure accurately and readably with a dial at least 6 inches in diameter or with a digital display. Each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit and shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of one copy of this chart. The cylinder extension during calibration shall be in approximately the position it will occupy at final jacking force. Jacks and gauges shall be recalibrated and recertified:

1.Annually,
2.After any repair or adjustment, and
3.Anytime there are indications that the jack calibration is in error. The Engineer may use load cells to check jacks, gauges, and calibration charts before and during tensioning. All load cells shall be calibrated and shall have an indicator that shows prestressing force in the strand. The range of this cell shall be broad enough that the lowest 10 percent of the manufacturer’s rated capacity will not be used to measure jacking force. From manufacture to encasement in concrete, prestressing strand shall be protected against dirt, oil, grease, damage, and all corrosives. Strand shall be stored in a dry, covered area and shall be kept in the manufacturer’s original packaging until placement in the forms. If prestressing strand has been damaged or pitted, it will be rejected. Prestressing strand with rust shall be spot-cleaned with a nonmetallic pad to inspect for any sign of pitting or section loss. Once the prestressing steel has been installed, no welds or grounds for welders shall be made on the forms or the steel in the girder, except as specified. When the Plans require temporary strands, they may be pretensioned or post-tensioned. If they are post-tensioned, they shall be stressed on the same day that the permanent prestress is released and prior to lifting the girder or segment. When the Plans require continuous temporary strands for spliced prestressed concrete girders, the girder shall be spliced and the temporary strands shall be post-tensioned prior to lifting the spliced girder. The Contractor shall be responsible for properly sizing the anchorage plates to prevent bursting or splitting of the concrete due to post-tensioning. The inside diameter of the debonding sleeves for all temporary strands shall be large enough such that the temporary strands fully retract upon cutting. Temporary strands shall be cut or released in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L5 . Post-tensioning of spliced prestressed concrete girders shall conform to Section

6-02.3(26) and the following requirements:

1.Before tensioning, the Contractor shall remove all side forms from the cast-in-place concrete closures. From this point until 48 hours after grouting the tendons, the Contractor shall keep all construction and other live loads off the Superstructure and shall keep the falsework supporting the superstructure in place. Page 6-120 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures2. The Contractor shall not tension the post-tensioning reinforcement until the concrete

in the cast-in-place closures reaches the minimum compressive strength specified in the Plans. This strength shall be measured with concrete cylinders made of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions as the cast-in-place closures.

3.All post-tensioning shall be completed before placing the sidewalks and barriers on the Superstructure.

6-02.3(25)C Casting

Side forms shall be steel except that cast-in-place concrete closure forms for spliced prestressed concrete girders, interior forms of prestressed concrete tub girders, and end bulkhead forms of prestressed concrete girders may be wood. Interior voids for prestressed concrete slab girders with voids shall be formed by either wax soaked cardboard or expanded polystyrene forms. The interior void forms shall be secured in the position as shown in the Working Drawings, and shall remain in place. All concrete mixes to be used shall be preapproved in the WSDOT plant certification process. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall be between 50°F and 90°F. Slump shall not exceed 4 inches for normal concrete nor 7 inches with the use of a high range water-reducing admixture, nor 9 inches when both a high range water-reducing admixture is used and the water/cement ratio is less than or equal to 0.35. For self- consolidating concrete (SCC), the slump requirements specified above do not apply, and are instead replaced by the target slump flow and slump flow range specified as part of the SCC mix design. Air-entrainment is not required in the concrete placed into prestressed concrete girders, cast-in-place concrete closures for spliced prestressed concrete girders, and prestressed concrete partial-depth stay-in-place panels, provided that the water/cement ratio is less than or equal to 0.45.

6-02.3(25)C1 Acceptance Testing of Concrete for Prestressed Concrete Girders

Compressive strength cylinders and concrete acceptance testing shall be performed once per prestressed concrete girder or once per fabrication line of prestressed concrete girders. Concrete shall not be placed until fresh concrete testing indicates concrete is within acceptable limits. Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Contractor and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted below, the test methods described in Section 6-02.3(5)D shall be followed. Concrete compressive strength shall be in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)E . Concrete that is not self-consolidating concrete will be accepted as follows:

1.Temperature within the allowable temperature band.
2.Slump below the maximum allowed. Concrete that is self-consolidating concrete will be accepted as follows:
1.Temperature within the allowable temperature band.
2.Slump flow within the target slump flow range
3.VSI less than or equal to 1 in accordance with ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using Filling Procedure B.
4.J ring passing ability less than or equal to 1.5-inches.
5.Rapid assessment of static segregation resistance of self-consolidating concrete using penetration test in accordance with ASTM C1712 shall be less than or equal to 15 mm. M 41-10 Page 6-121 Concrete Structures 6-026-02.3(25)D Curing During curing, the Contractor shall keep the girder in a saturated curing atmosphere until the girder concrete has reached the required release strength. If the Engineer concurs, the Contractor may shorten curing time by heating the outside of impervious forms. Heat may be radiant, convection, conducted steam, or hot air. With steam, the arrangement shall envelop the entire surface with saturated steam. Hot air curing will not be allowed, unless the Contractor submits Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the proposed method to envelop and maintain the girder in a saturated atmosphere. Saturated atmosphere means a relative humidity of at least 90 percent. The Contractor shall never allow dry heat to touch the girder surface at any point. Under heat curing methods, the Contractor shall:
1.Keep all unformed girder surfaces in a saturated atmosphere throughout the curing time;
2.Embed a thermocouple (linked with a thermometer accurate to plus or minus 5°F) 6 to 8 inches from the top or bottom of the girder on its centerline and near its midpoint;
3.Monitor with a recording sensor (accurate to plus or minus 5°F) arranged and calibrated to continuously record, date, and identify concrete temperature throughout the heating cycle;
4.Make this temperature record available for the Engineer to inspect;
5.Heat concrete to no more than 100°F during the first 2 hours after placing the concrete, and then increase no more than 25°F per hour to a maximum of 175°F;
6.Cool concrete, after curing is complete, no more than 25°F per hour, to 100°F; and
7.Keep the temperature of the concrete above 60°F until the girder reaches release strength. The Contractor may strip side forms from prestressed concrete girders once the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. All damage from stripping is the Contractor’s responsibility. Curing of cast-in-place concrete closures for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall conform to Section 6-02.3(11) .

6-02.3(25)E Contractors Control Strength

Concrete strength shall be measured on test cylinders cast from the same concrete as that in the girder. These cylinders shall be cured under time-temperature relationships and conditions that simulate those of the girder. If the forms are heated by steam or hot air, test cylinders will remain in the coolest zone throughout curing. If forms are heated another way, the Contractor shall provide a record of the curing time-temperature relationship for the cylinders for each girder to the Engineer. When two or more girders are cast in a continuous line and in a continuous pour, a single set of test cylinders may represent all girders provided the Contractor demonstrates uniformity of casting and curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall mold, cure, and test enough of these cylinders to satisfy Specification requirements for measuring concrete strength. The Contractor may use 4- by 8-inch or 6- by 12-inch cylinders. Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100 after the girder concrete has obtained the required release strength. If, however, the Contractor intends to ship the girder prior to the standard 28-day strength test, the design strength for shipping shall be determined from cylinders placed with the girder and cured under the same conditions as the girder. These cylinders may be placed in an unninsulated, moisture-proof envelope. Page 6-122 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresTo measure concrete strength in the girder, the Contractor shall randomly select two test

cylinders. The average compressive strength of the two cylinders shall be equal or greater than the specified strength and neither cylinder shall have a compressive strength that is more than 5 percent below the specified strength. If too few cylinders were molded to carry out all required tests on the girder, the Contractor shall sample and test cores from the girder under the surveillance of the Engineer. Cores sampled from one girder may not be used to represent any other girder, regardless of whether the girders were cast in a continuous line or pour. Cores shall avoid all prestressing strands, steel reinforcing bars and interior voids. For prestressed concrete slab girders, a test shall consist of four cores measuring 3 inches in diameter by 6 inches in length (for slabs) or by the thickness of the web (for ribbed and double tee sections). Two cores shall be taken from each side of the girder with one on each side of the girder span midpoint, at locations accepted by the Engineer. The core locations for prestressed concrete ribbed and double tee sections shall be immediately beneath the top flange. For prestressed concrete tub girders, a test shall consist of four cores measuring 3 inches in diameter by the thickness of the web. Two cores shall be taken from each web approximately 3 feet to the left and to the right of the center of the girder span. For all other prestressed concrete girders, a test shall consist of three cores measuring 3 inches in diameter by the thickness of the web and shall be removed from just below the top flange; one at the midpoint of the girder’s length and the other two approximately 3 feet to the left and approximately 3 feet to the right. The cores shall be taken in accordance with AASHTO T 24 and shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22. The Engineer may accept the girder if the average compressive strength of the all test cores from the girder are at least 85 percent of the specified compressive strength with no one core less than 75 percent of specified compressive strength. If there are more than four cored holes in a girder, the prestressing reinforcement shall not be released until the holes are patched and the patch material has attained a minimum compressive strength equal to the required release compressive strength. All cored holes shall be patched and cured prior to shipment of the girder. The girder shall not be shipped until tests show the patch material has attained a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi. If the annual plant approval includes procedures for patching cored holes, the cored holes shall be patched in accordance with this procedure. Otherwise, the Contractor shall submit a core hole patching procedure as a Type 2 Working Drawing.

6-02.3(25)F Prestress Release

Side and flange forms that restrain deflection shall be removed before release of the prestressing reinforcement. All strands shall be released in a way that will minimize eccentricity of the prestressing force about the centerline of the girder. This release shall not occur until tests show each girder has reached the minimum compressive strength required by the Plans. The Contractor may request permission to release the prestressing reinforcement at a minimum concrete compressive strength less than specified in the Plans. This request shall be submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing analyzing changes in vertical deflection, girder lateral stability and concrete stresses in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2 .

6-02.3(25)G Protection of Exposed Reinforcement

When a girder is removed from its casting bed, all prestressing reinforcement strands projecting from the girder shall be cleaned and painted with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B , and all steel reinforcing bars, including M 41-10 Page 6-123 Concrete Structures 6-02welded wire fabric, projecting from the girder shall be protected in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)B . During handling and shipping, projecting reinforcement shall be protected from bending or breaking. Just before placing concrete around the painted projecting bars or strands, the Contractor shall remove from them all spattered concrete remaining from girder casting, dirt, oil, and other foreign matter.

6-02.3(25)H Finishing

The Contractor shall apply a Class 1 finish, as defined in Section 6-02.3(14) , to:

1.The exterior surfaces of the outside girders; and
2.The bottoms, sides, and tops of the lower flanges on all girders, including the top of the bottom slab between the tub girder webs. All other girder surfaces shall receive a Class 2 finish. The interface on girders that contact a cast-in-place concrete deck shall have a finish of dense, screeded concrete without a smooth sheen or laitance on the surface. After vibrating and screeding, and just before the concrete reaches initial set, the Contractor shall texture the interface. This texture shall be applied with a steel brooming tool that etches the surface transversely leaving grooves ⅛ to ¼ inch wide, between ⅛ and ¼ inch deep, and spaced ¼ to ½ inch apart. On prestressed concrete wide flange deck girders, deck bulb tee girders, ribbed section girders and double tee girders, the Contractor shall test the top surface for flatness and make corrections in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D3 except that the straightedge need not exceed the width of the girder top flange when checking the transverse direction. The top surface shall be finished in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D6 . The Contractor may repair defects in prestressed concrete girders in accordance with Section 6-01.16 .

6-02.3(25)I Fabrication Tolerances

The girders shall be fabricated as shown in the processed shop drawings and shall meet the dimensional tolerances listed below. Construction tolerances of cast-in-place closures for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall conform to the tolerances specified for spliced prestressed concrete girders. Actual acceptance or rejection will depend on how the Engineer believes a defect outside these tolerances will affect the Structure’s strength or appearance:

1.Length: ± ¼ inch per 25 feet of beam length, up to a maximum of ± 1½ inches
2.Width: Flanges and webs: + ⅜ inch, - ¼ inch Slab girders: ± ¼ inch
3.Girder Depth (overall): ± ¼ inch
4.Flange Depth: ± ¼ inch
5.Strand Position: Individual strands: ± ¼ inch Bundled strands: ± ½ inch Harped strand group center of gravity at the girder ends: ± 1 inch
6.Longitudinal Location of Harp Points for Harped Strands from Design Locations: ± 20 inches Page 6-124 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures7. Position of an Interior Void, vertically

and horizontally: ± ½ inch

8.Bearing Recess (center of recess to girder end): ± ⅝ inch
9.Girder Ends (deviation from square or designated skew): Horizontal: ± ⅛ inch per foot of girder width, up to a maximum of ± ½ inch Vertical: ± 3/16 inch per foot of girder depth, up to a maximum of ± 1 inch
10.Bearing Area Deviation from Plane (in length or width of bearing): ± ⅛ inch.
11.Stirrup Reinforcing Spacing: ± 1 inch.
12.Stirrup Projection from Top of Girder: Wide flange thin deck and slab girders: ± 1/2 inch All other girders: ± ¾ inch
13.Mild Steel Concrete Cover: - ⅛ inch, + ⅜ inch.
14.Local smoothness of surfaces: ± ¼ inch. in 10 feet
15.Differential Camber between Girders in a Span (measured in place at the job site): For wide flange deck and deck bulb tee girders with a cast-in-place reinforced concrete deck: Cambers shall be equalized when the differences in cambers between adjacent girders exceeds ± ¾ inch For wide flange deck, deck bulb tee and slab girders without a cast-in-place reinforced deck: Cambers shall be equalized when the differences in cambers between adjacent girders exceeds ± ¼ inch
16.Position of Inserts for Structural Connections: ± 1 inch.
17.Position of Lifting Embedments: ± 3 inches longitudinal, ± ¼ inch transverse.
18.Weld Ties: ± ½ inch longitudinal, ± ⅛ inch vertical.
19.Position of post tensioning ducts in spliced prestressed concrete girders: ± ¼ inch.
20.Deviation from a smooth curve for post-tensioning ducts at closures based on the sum total of duct placement and alignment tolerances: ± ⅜ inch.

6-02.3(25)J Horizontal Alignment

The Contractor shall check and record the horizontal alignment (sweep) of each girder at the following times:

1.Initial – Upon removal of the girder from the casting bed
2.Shipment – Within 14 days prior to shipment; and
3.Erection – After girder erection and cutting temporary top strands but prior to equalization, welding ties or placement of diaphragms. M 41-10 Page 6-125 Concrete Structures 6-02Horizontal alignment of the top and bottom flanges shall be checked and recorded. Alternatively, the Contractor may check and record the horizontal alignment of the web near mid-height of the girder. Each check shall be made by measuring the maximum offset at mid-span relative to a chord that starts and stops at the girder ends. The Contractor shall check and record the alignment at a time when the girder is not influenced by temporary differences in surface temperature. Records for the initial check (item 1 above) shall be included in the Contractor’s prestressed concrete certificate of compliance. Records for all other checks shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing. For each check (items 1 to 3 above), the alignment shall not be offset more than ⅛ inch for each 10 feet of girder length. Girders not meeting this tolerance for the shipment check (item 2 above) shall require an analysis of girder lateral stability and stresses in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2 . The Contractor shall perform this analysis and submit it as a Type 2E Working Drawing prior to shipment of the girder. Girders that exceed an offset of ⅛ inch for each 10 feet of girder length for the erection check (item 3 above) shall be corrected at the job site to the ⅛ inch maximum offset per 10 feet of girder length before concrete is placed into the diaphragms. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing for required corrective action, if any. The maximum distance between the side of a prestressed concrete slab girder, or the edge of the top flange of a wide flange deck, wide flange thin deck or deck bulb tee girder, and a chord that extends the full length of the girder shall be ± ½ inch after erection (item 3 above). For girders taller than 3 feet, the Contractor shall check and record the plumbness at the ends of each girder after temporary bracing for erection is in place and prior to erecting subsequent girders.

6-02.3(25)K Vertical Deflection

The Contractor shall check and record the vertical deflection (camber) of each girder at the following times:

1.Initial – Upon removal of the girder from the casting bed;
2.Shipment – Within 14 days prior to shipment;
3.Erection – After girder erection and cutting temporary top strands but prior to equalization, welding ties or placement of diaphragms. At a minimum, survey data shall be taken at each girder end and at midspan. The Contractor shall perform and record each check at a time when the alignment of the girder is not influenced by temporary differences in surface temperature. Records for the initial check (Item 1 above) shall be included in the Contractor’s Prestressed Concrete Certificate of Compliance. Records for all other checks shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing. Girders with vertical deflections not meeting the limit shown in the Plans for the shipment check (item 2 above) shall require an analysis of girder lateral stability and stresses in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2 . The Contractor shall perform this analysis and submit it as a Type 2E Working Drawing prior to shipment. The “D” dimensions shown in the Plans are computed upper and lower bounds of girder vertical deflections at midspan based on a time lapse of 40 and 120 days after release of the prestressing strands. Temporary top strands are assumed to be cut 30 days prior to these elapsed times (10 and 90 days after release of the prestressing strands). Diaphragms are assumed to be placed. The “D” dimensions are intended to advise the Contractor of the expected range of girder vertical deflection at the time of deck placement. A positive (+) “D” dimension indicates upward deflection. Page 6-126 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresIf the girder vertical deflection measured for the erection check (item 3 above) is not

between the lower “D” dimension bound shown in the Plans and the upper “D” dimension bound shown in the Plans plus ¾ inches, the Engineer may require corrective action. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing for all required corrective actions.

6-02.3(25)L Handling and Storage

The Contractor shall be responsible for safely lifting, shipping, and erecting prestressed concrete girders. During handling and storage, each prestressed concrete girder shall always be kept plumb and upright. It shall be lifted only by the lifting embedments (strand lift loops or high- strength threaded steel bars) at either end. The Contract documents may provide shipping and handling details for girders including lifting embedment locations (L), shipping support locations (L1 and L2), minimum shipping support rotational spring constants (Kθ), minimum shipping support center-to- center wheel spacings (Wcc), vertical deflections and number of temporary top strands. These shipping and handling details have been determined in accordance with Section

6-02.3(25)L2 and are suggested only.

The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing analyzing girder lateral stability and concrete stresses during lifting, storage, shipping and erection in accordance with

1.If any of the analysis assumptions listed in Section 6-02.3(25)L2 are invalid. Determination of validity shall be made by the Contractor, except that analysis assumptions shall be considered invalid if the actual values are outside of the provided tolerances.
2.If the Contractor intends to use shipping and handling configurations or details different than those in the Contract documents, or if the Contractor intends to handle the girder with temporary works or appurtenances attached to the girder. If the only deviation from the listed assumptions is to the location of the shipping support points such that stability is improved, the concrete stresses shall be analyzed, but the lateral stability may be waived.
3.If the Contract documents do not provide shipping and handling details.

6-02.3(25)L1 Lifting and Handling Devices

For strand lift loops in girders with a maximum depth of 3 feet, only ½-inch diameter or 0.6-inch diameter strand conforming to Section 9-07.10 shall be used, and a minimum 2-inch diameter straight pin of a shackle shall be used through the loops. Multiple loops shall be held level in the girder during casting in a manner that allows each loop to carry its share of the load during lifting. The minimum distance from the end of the girder to the centroid of the strand lift loops shall be 3 feet. The loops for all prestressed concrete girders shall project a minimum of 1′-6″ from the top of the girder. Loops shall extend to within 3 inches clear of the bottom of the girder, terminating with a 9-inch long 90-degree hook. Loads on individual loops shall be limited to 12 kips, and the angle between a lifting cable and the top of the girder shall not be less than 60 degrees. For high-strength threaded steel bars, a minimum of two 1⅜-inch diameter bars conforming to Section 9-07.11 shall be used at each end of the girder. The lifting hardware that connects to the bars shall be designed, detailed, and furnished by the Contractor. The minimum distance from the end of the girder to the centroid of the lifting bars shall be 3 feet. Lifting bars shall extend to within 3 inches of the bottom of the girder and shall be anchored in the bottom flange with steel plates and nuts. The minimum size of embedded plates for lifting bars shall be ½ inch thick by 3 inches square. Lifting forces on the lifting bars shall not exceed 58 kips on an individual bar and shall be within 10 degrees of perpendicular to the top of the girder. M 41-10 Page 6-127 Concrete Structures 6-02Lifting loops or embedments for girders with a depth less than 3 feet shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor.

6-02.3(25)L2 Girder Lateral Stability and Stress Analysis

Analysis for girder lateral stability and concrete stresses during lifting, storage, shipping and erection shall be in accordance with the PCI Recommended Practice for Lateral Stability of Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge Girders , First Edition, including March 2020 errata, Publication CB-02-16-E and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications edition identified in the Contract documents. The following design criteria shall be met:

1.Factor of Safety against cracking shall be at least 1.0
2.Factor of Safety against failure shall be at least 1.5
3.Factor of Safety against rollover shall be at least 1.5
4.Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.CompressiveAll locations (except as noted) At section extremities (i.e., flange tips) when lateral bending is explicitly considered6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting Bed Tensile In areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and Erection Tensile In areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service Load Tensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 Compressive Effective prestress and permanent loads 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue Load Compressive Fatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.CompressiveAll locations (except as noted) At section extremities (i.e., flange tips) when lateral bending is explicitly considered6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting Bed Tensile In areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and Erection Tensile In areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.7𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service Load Tensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 Compressive Effective prestress and permanent loads 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue Load Compressive Fatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effective prestress and permanent loads6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of construction and in service: Condition Stress Location Allowable Stress (ksi) Temporary Stress at Transfer and Lifting from Casting BedTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Temporary Stress at Shipping and ErectionTensileIn areas without bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′≤0.2 In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ In areas with bonded reinforcement sufficient to resist the tensile force in the concrete when shipping at 6% superelevation, without impact0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Compressive All locations 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Service LoadTensile Precompressed tensile zone 0.0 CompressiveEffective prestress and permanent loads0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Effective prestress, permanent loads and transient (live) loads0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Final Stresses at Fatigue LoadCompressiveFatigue I Load Combination plus one-half effectiv e prestress and permanent loads0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ Variables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications. Page 6-128 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresVariables are as defined in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.

The analysis shall address all effects on girder vertical deflection (camber), “A” dimensions at centerline of bearings and deck screed cambers (C). Suggested shipping and handling details provided in the Contract documents have been determined using the following analysis assumptions, unless shown otherwise:

1.Girder dimensions, strand locations and lifting embedment locations are within the tolerances specified in Section 6-02.3(25)I .
2.Girder horizontal alignment (sweep) is within the tolerance specified in
3.Girder vertical deflection (camber) at midspan is less than or equal to the maximum midspan vertical deflection at shipping shown in the Plans.
4.Minimum concrete compressive strength at release (f’ci) has been reached before initial lifting from casting bed. Minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days (f’c) has been reached before shipping.
5.Lifting lines are plumb.
6.Height of girder bottom above roadway at shipping supports is less than or equal to 72 inches.
7.Height of shipping support roll center above roadway is 24 inches, ± 2 inches.
8.Shipping support longitudinal placement (L1 and L2) tolerance is ± 6 inches.
9.Shipping support lateral placement tolerance is ±1 inches.
10.Shipping supports provide the minimum shipping support rotational spring constant (Kθ) and minimum shipping support center-to-center wheel spacings (Wcc) shown in the Plans.
11.For shipping at highway speeds a ±20 percent dynamic load allowance (impact) is included with a typical roadway superelevation of 2 percent.
12.For turning at slow speeds, no dynamic load allowance (impact) is included with a maximum roadway superelevation of 6 percent.
13.Wind, centrifugal and seismic forces are not considered.
14.Configurations where a girder is hanging from a lifting line at one end and seated without a lifting line connected at the other end are not considered.
15.Temporary works or appurtenances are not attached to the girder.

6-02.3(25)L3 Girder Storage

If girders are to be stored, the Contractor shall place them on a stable foundation that will keep them in a vertical position. Stored girders shall be supported at the bearing recesses or, if there are no recesses, approximately 2 to 3 feet from the girder ends. After post- tensioning, spliced prestressed concrete girders shall be supported at points between 2 and 5 feet from the girder ends, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. For long-term storage of girders with initial horizontal curvature, the Contractor may wedge one side of the bottom flange, tilting the girders to control curvature. If the Contractor elects to set girders out of plumb during storage, the Contractor shall have the proposed method analyzed by the Contractor’s engineer to ensure against damaging the girder.

6-02.3(25)L4 Girder Shipping

After the girder has reached its 28-day design strength, the girder and a completed Certification of Compliance, signed by a Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Certified Technician or a Professional Engineer, shall be submitted to the Engineer for inspection. If the Engineer finds the certification and the girder to be acceptable, the Engineer will stamp the girder “Approved for Shipment”. M 41-10 Page 6-129 Concrete Structures 6-02No prestressed concrete slab girder shall be shipped for at least 3 days after concrete placement. No prestressed concrete wide flange deck, deck bulb tee or tub girder shall be shipped for at least 7 days after concrete placement, except that they may be shipped 3 days after concrete placement when L/(bd) is less than or equal to 5.0, where L equals the shipping length of the girder, b equals the girder top flange width (for prestressed concrete wide flange deck and deck bulb tee girders) or the bottom flange width (for prestressed concrete tub girders), and d equals the girder depth, all in feet. No other girder shall be shipped for at least 10 days after concrete placement. Girder support locations during shipping shall be no closer than the girder depth to the ends of the girder at the girder centerline. If the Contractor elects to assemble spliced prestressed concrete girders into shipping configurations not shown in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing analyzing girder lateral stability and concrete stresses in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2 before shipping.

6-02.3(25)L5 Girder Erection

Before erecting prestressed concrete girders, the Contractor shall submit an erection plan as a Type 2E Working Drawing. The erection plan shall provide complete details of the erection process including at a minimum:

1.Temporary falsework support, bracing, guys, gravity anchors, and attachments to other Structure components or objects;
2.Procedure and sequence of operation;
3.Girder stresses during progressive stages of erection in accordance with
4.Girder weights, lift points, lifting embedments and devices, spreaders, and angle of lifting cables in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L , etc.;
5.Crane(s) make and model, mass, geometry, lift capacity, outrigger size, and reactions;
6.Girder launcher or trolley details and capacity (if intended for use);
7.Locations of cranes, barges, trucks delivering girders, and the location of cranes and outriggers relative to other Structures, including retaining walls and wing walls; and
8.Plans and calculations for all temporary support and bracing systems to resist all anticipated construction loads through construction of the bridge deck.
9.Methods for measuring and adjusting plumbness at girder ends. The erection plan shall include drawings, notes, catalog cuts, and calculations clearly showing the above listed details, assumptions, and dimensions. Material properties and specifications, structural analysis, and all other data used shall also be included. The concrete in piers and crossbeams shall reach at least 80 percent of design strength before girders are placed on them. The Contractor shall hoist girders only by the lifting embedments at the ends, always keeping the girders plumb and upright. When the girders are to receive a cast-in-place concrete deck, lifting embedments shall be removed after erection to provide a minimum 2½-inch clearance to the top of the deck. When the girders are not to receive a cast-in- place concrete deck, lifting embedments shall be removed 1-inch below the girder surface and grouted with an epoxy grout conforming to Section 9-26.3(1)A . The girders shall be braced in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(17)F4 and 6-02.3(17)F5 . When temporary strands in the top flange are used, they shall be cut after the girders are braced and before the girder deflections are equalized and the intermediate diaphragms are cast. Page 6-130 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresInstead of the oak block wedges shown in the Plans, the Contractor may use Douglas fir

blocks if the grain is vertical. The height of oak block wedges at the girder centerline shall not exceed the width. The Contractor shall fill all block-out holes with a mortar or grout acceptable to the Engineer. Stop plates and dowel bars for prestressed concrete girders shall be set with either epoxy grout conforming to Section 9-26.3 or type IV epoxy bonding agent conforming to Section 9-26.1 .

6-02.3(25)M Girder to Girder Connections

When differential camber between adjacent girders in a span exceeds the tolerance in Section 6-02.3(25)I , the Contractor shall submit a method of equalizing deflections as a Type 1 Working Drawing. All temporary strands in the top flange shall be cut in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L5 prior to equalizing girder deflections. Prestressed concrete girders shall be constructed in the following sequence:

1.If required, deflections shall be equalized in accordance with the Contractor’s equalization plan.
2.Intermediate diaphragms shall be placed and all weld ties shall be welded in accordance with Section 6-03.3(25) . Welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel plates being welded when welding the weld-ties.
3.All keyways between adjacent girders shown in the Plans to receive grout shall be filled flush with the surrounding surfaces using a grout conforming to Section 9-20.3(2) .
4.Equalization equipment shall not be removed and other construction equipment shall not be placed on the structure until intermediate diaphragms and keyway grout have attained a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi.

6-02.3(26) Post-Tensioned Concrete

Multistrand post-tensioned structures and grouted post-tensioned structures shall conform to the requirements of PTI/ASBI M50.3-19 Specification for Multistrand and Grouted Post-Tensioning . Grouting for post-tensioning systems shall conform to the requirements of PTI M55.1-19 Specification for Grouting of Post-Tensioned Structures . Permanent unbonded single-strand post-tensioning shall conform to the requirements of PTI M10.2-17 Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons . These specifications shall be collectively referred to as the “PTI requirements.” Within the PTI requirements, the term “Construction Engineer” shall be taken as the Engineer.

6-02.3(26)A Post-Tensioning Materials

PTI requirements for materials and components shall not supersede the requirements of

Division 9

Prestressing material shall conform to Section 9-07.10 or Section 9-07.11 . Special prestressing materials shall not be used unless specified in the Contract documents. Post-tensioning systems for multistrand and grouted post-tensioning for permanent structures shall conform to the PTI requirements for Protection Level 2 (PL-2) unless noted otherwise. Grout for post-tensioning tendons shall be a Grout Type 1 in accordance with Section

9-20.3(1) Non-shrink grout for pourbacks and repairs shall be a Grout Type 2 in

accordance with Section 9-20.3(2) . Epoxy grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-26.3 . M 41-10 Page 6-131 Concrete Structures 6-02Elastomeric coatings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C836. High molecular weight methacrylate shall confirm to the requirements of Section 6-21.2(3) . The post-tensioning system supplier shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for all components unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

6-02.3(26)B Personnel

The Contractor shall designate a Direct Supervisor of Post-Tensioning Operations with responsibility over all post-tensioning system installation work. The Contractor shall designate installation & stressing and grouting crew supervisors. Post-Tensioning Operations personnel qualifications shall meet the minimum requirements stated in the PTI requirements, except that personnel qualifications are not required for installation work other than stressing and grouting performed in facilities approved by WSDOT as a Certified Prestress Concrete Fabricator prior to the start of construction. The post-tensioning system supplier shall designate a Quality Assurance (QA) Manager.

6-02.3(26)C Submittals

Complete post-tensioning installation drawings shall be submitted as Type 2E Working Drawings. Installation drawings shall include system drawings, tendon drawings, anchorage coating system, stressing calculations, post-tensioning anchorage test reports, and proof of qualification for the Direct Supervisor of Post-Tensioning Operations and the Quality Assurance Manager. Post-tensioning anchorage test reports shall include all information necessary for post-tensioning system approval in accordance with the PTI requirements, including the following information for special anchorage device acceptance testing:

1.Dimensions of the test specimen.
2.Working Drawings with details and dimensions of the special anchorage device, including all confining reinforcing steel.
3.Amount and arrangement of supplementary skin reinforcement.
4.Type and yield strength of reinforcing steel.
5.Type and compressive strength of the concrete at the time of testing.
6.Type of testing procedure and all measurements specified for each specimen under the test. Certifications for all supervisory and crew personnel used to meet the PTI requirements shall be submitted as Type 1 Working Drawings at least 7 days prior to delivery of any post-tensioning system components to the job site, except the qualifications for grouting personnel may be submitted with the written grouting procedures instead. Written grouting procedure including all items listed in the PTI requirements shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. Jack and gauge unit calibration charts shall be submitted to the Engineer as a Type 1 Working Drawing at least 7 days prior to stressing. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit certified calibration reports for load cells used to calibrate each jack and gage combination as a Type 1 Working Drawing. Stressing records for each tendon shall be submitted to the Engineer as a Type 1 Working Drawing within 3 days after tendon stressing, and prior to grouting. Grouting records shall be submitted as Type 1 Working Drawings within 3 days after each grouting operation. Traceability documents and records shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing upon completion of the post-tensioning system installation. Page 6-132 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresIf requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the Post-tensioning System

supplier’s system approval testing records as a Type 1 Working Drawing. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit the Post-tensioning System supplier’s project quality plan as a Type 1 Working Drawing.

6-02.3(26)D Design

Tendon locations shown in the Plans indicate final positions after stressing (unless the Plans indicate otherwise). These stress limits apply to all tendons (unless the Plans set other limits):

1.During jacking prior to seating: less than 90 percent of the yield strength of the steel.
2.At couplers and anchorages immediately after seating: less than 70 percent of the specified tensile strength of the steel.
3.At all other locations along the tendons away from couplers and anchorages immediately after seating: 74 percent of the specified tensile strength of the steel for low relaxation strands, and 70 percent of the specified tensile strength of the steel for all other post-tensioning steel.
4.At service limit state after losses: 80 percent of the yield strength of the steel. Friction losses used to calculate forces of the post-tensioning steel shall be based on the assumed values used for the design. The assumed anchor set, friction coefficient “μ”, and wobble coefficient “k” values for design are shown in the Plans. The post-tensioning supplier may revise the anchor set value provided all stress limits are satisfied throughout the structure. Tendons less than 20 feet require detailed friction calculations that considers the wedge seating method used. Anchor devices and local zones shall either be designed in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, current edition, or tested as a special anchorage device in accordance with the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, current edition. Dead ended anchorages will not be permitted unless shown otherwise in the plans. Dead ended anchorages are defined as anchorages that cannot be accessed during the stressing operations. The structure shall be reinforced with steel reinforcing bars specifically designed and detailed in the anchorage zone in the vicinity of the anchorage device. This reinforcement shall be categorized into two zones. The first or local zone shall be the concrete surrounding and immediately ahead of the anchorage device. The second or general zone shall be the overall anchorage zone, including the local zone. The steel reinforcing bars required for concrete confinement in the local zone shall be determined by the post-tensioning system supplier and shall be shown in the installation drawings. The calculations shall be included. The local zone steel reinforcing bars shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. The steel reinforcing bars required in the general zone shall be as shown in the Plans and are included in the appropriate Bid items. The Contractor shall determine all points of interference between the mild steel reinforcement and the paths of the post-tensioning tendons. Details to resolve interferences shall be submitted with the installation drawings for acceptance.

6-02.3(26)E General Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall construct supporting falsework in a way that leaves the Superstructure free to contract and lift off the falsework during post-tensioning unless shown otherwise in the Plans. Forms that will remain inside box girders to support the bridge deck shall, by design, resist girder contraction as little as possible. M 41-10 Page 6-133 Concrete Structures 6-02Before tensioning, the Contractor shall remove all side forms from girders. From this point until 48 hours after grouting the tendons, the Contractor shall keep all construction and other live loads off the Superstructure and shall keep the falsework supporting the Superstructure in place. All post-tensioning shall be completed as specified in the Contract Plans.

6-02.3(26)F Duct and Component Installation

Vents shall be oriented entirely upwards from the tendon, and drains shall be oriented entirely downward from the tendon.

6-02.3(26)G Prestressing Steel Installation & Stressing

Prestressing strand shall not be spliced. Prestressing bar shall only be spliced at locations shown in the Plans. Once the prestressing steel is installed, no welds or welding grounds shall be attached to metal forms, structural steel, or reinforcing bars of the structural member. The Contractor shall not stress the strands until all concrete has reached a compressive strength of at least 4,000 psi unless otherwise shown in the Plans. This strength shall be measured on concrete test cylinders made of the same concrete cured under the same conditions as the cast-in-place unit. If the prestressing steel will not be stressed and grouted within 7 calendar days after it is placed in the ducts, the Contractor shall apply a corrosion inhibitor.

6-02.3(26)H Grouting

Duct air tests, in accordance with the PTI requirements, shall be performed prior to grouting. Grout wet density tests shall be performed at the mixer on the first batch of grout and every 2 hours subsequently. Wet density shall be tested at the last outlet of each tendon. The wet density test shall conform to ANSI/API Mud Balance Test, and values shall fall within the range specified by the grout manufacturer. Grout fluidity tests shall be performed at the mixer on the first batch of grout and every 2 hours subsequently. The fluidity test shall conform to ASTM C939 as modified in the PTI requirements, and the efflux time shall be within 5 seconds of the values established during laboratory testing. A grout bleed test shall be prior to production grouting for each truckload of prepackaged grout delivered to the job site. The bleed test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C1741, with the acceptance criteria of the PTI requirements. A grout volume change test shall be performed every day of grouting if an expansive admixture is used for external tendons. The volume change test shall conform to ASTM C1090. The vertical height change shall be between 0% and +0.50% at 24 hours and at 28 days. Grout compressive strength specimens shall be collected every day of grouting. The Contractor shall make grout cubes in accordance with WSDOT T 813 and store the grout cubes in accordance with FOP for AASHTO R 100. Compressive strength testing shall conform to AASHTO T 106. The compressive strength shall be tested at 7 days and 28 days for reference only.

6-02.3(26)I Protection of Anchorages

When anchorages are poured back with pre-packaged materials such as non-shrink grout or epoxy grout, materials shall be placed in accordance with the respective manufacturer’s recommendations. Anchorage Coating Systems shall be installed in accordance with the post tensioning installation Working Drawing. Page 6-134 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete Structures6-02.4 Measurement

Except as noted below, all classes of concrete shall be measured in place by the cubic yard to the neat lines of the Structure as shown in the Plans. Exception: concrete in cofferdam seals. Payment for Class 4000W concrete used in these seals will be based on the volume calculated using the neatline dimensions for the seal as shown in the Contract Plans. For calculated purposes, the horizontal dimension will be increased by 1 foot outside the seal neatline perimeter. The vertical dimension is the distance between the top and bottom neatline elevations. No payment will be made for concrete that lies outside of these limits to accommodate the Contractor’s cofferdam configuration. If the Engineer eliminates the seal in its entirety a Contract change order will be issued. Exception: concrete in a separate lump-sum, Superstructure Bid item. Concrete quantities noted under this item in the Special Provisions will not be measured. Although the Special Provisions list approximate quantities for the Contractor’s convenience, the Contracting Agency does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. Before submitting a Bid, the Contractor shall have verified the quantities. Even though actual quantities used may vary from those listed in the Special Provisions, the Contracting Agency will not adjust the lump sum Contract price for Superstructure (except for processed changes). The Contracting Agency will not measure concrete placed below the established elevation of the bottom of footings or seals. Lean concrete Type 1 and lean concrete Type 2 will be measured by the cubic yard for the quantity of material placed, except that lean concrete Type 1 or lean concrete Type 2 included in other Contract items will not be measured. No deduction will be made for pile heads, reinforcing steel, structural steel, bolts, weep holes, rustications, chamfers, edgers, joint filler, junction boxes, miscellaneous hardware, ducts or less than 6-inch diameter drain pipes when computing concrete quantities for payment. All reinforcing steel will be measured by the computed weight of all steel required by the Plans. The weight of mechanical splices will be based on the weight specified in the manufacturer’s existing catalog cut for the specific item. Splices noted as optional in the plans but installed by the Contractor will be included in the measurement. Epoxy- coated bars will be measured before coating. The Contractor shall furnish (without extra allowance):

1.Bracing, spreaders, form blocks, wire clips, and other fasteners.
2.Extra steel in splices not shown in the Plans or specified in the Plans as optional.
3.Extra shear steel at construction joints not shown in the Plans when the Engineer permits such joints for the Contractor’s convenience. The following table shall be used to compute weight of reinforcing steel: Steel Reinforcing Bar Deformed Bar Designation Number Nominal Diameter inchesUnit Weight Pounds per Foot 3 0.375 0.376 4 0.500 0.668 5 0.625 1.043 6 0.750 1.502 7 0.875 2.044 8 1.000 2.670 M 41-10 Page 6-135 Concrete Structures 6-02Steel Reinforcing Bar Deformed Bar Designation Number Nominal Diameter inchesUnit Weight Pounds per Foot 9 1.128 3.400 10 1.270 4.303 11 1.410 5.313 14 1.690 7.650 18 2.260 13.600 Gravel backfill will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4 . Expansion joint system strip seal – superstr. and expansion joint system compression seal – superstr. will be measured by the linear foot along its completed line and slope. Expansion joint modification will be measured by the linear foot of expansion joint modified along its completed line and slope. Prestressed concrete girder will be measured by the linear foot of girder specified in the Proposal. Bridge approach slab will be measured by the square yard. Permeon treatment will be measured by the square yard of concrete surface area receiving the treatment. Fabricated bearing assemblies (HLMR bearings, fabric pad bearings, transverse restrainer bearings, and pin bearings) will be measured per each for each bearing assembly furnished and installed.

6-02.5 Payment

Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items that are included in the Proposal: “Conc. Class ____”, per cubic yard. “Commercial Concrete”, per cubic yard. All concrete, except in Superstructure when this is covered by a separate Bid item, will be paid for at the unit Contract price per cubic yard in place for the various classes of concrete. All costs in connection with concrete curing, producing concrete surface finish, and furnishing and applying sealer to concrete surfaces as specified, shall be included in the unit contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class ____”. If the concrete is to be paid for other than by class of concrete, then the costs shall be included in the associated item of Work. “Superstructure (name bridge)”, lump sum. All costs in connection with constructing, finishing and removing the bridge deck test slab as specified in Section 6-02.3(10)D1 shall be included in the lump sum Contract price for “Superstructure___” or “Bridge Deck___” for one bridge in each project, as applicable. All costs in connection with providing holes for vents, for furnishing and installing cell drainage pipes for box girder Structures, and furnishing and placing grout and shims under steel shoes shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items involved. All costs in connection with the construction of weep holes, including the gravel backfill for drains surrounding the weep holes except as provided in Section 2-09.4 , shall be included by the Contractor in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class ____”. Page 6-136 M 41-10

6-02 Concrete StructuresAll costs for Resin Bonded Anchors shall be included in other Bid Items involved.

“Lean Concrete”, per cubic yard. Lean concrete Type 1 or lean concrete Type 2, except when included in another Bid item, will be paid for at the unit Contract price for "Lean Concrete", per cubic yard. “St. Reinf. Bar ____”, per pound. “Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar ____”, per pound. Payment for reinforcing steel shall include the cost of drilling holes in concrete for, and setting, steel reinforcing bar dowels with epoxy bonding agent, and furnishing, fabricating, placing, and splicing the reinforcement. In Structures of reinforced concrete where there are no structural steel Bid items, such minor metal parts as expansion joints, bearing assemblies, and bolts will be paid for at the unit Contract price for “St. Reinf. Bar ____” unless otherwise specified. “Gravel Backfill for Foundation Class A”, per cubic yard. “Gravel Backfill for Foundation Class B”, per cubic yard. “Gravel Backfill for Wall”, per cubic yard. “Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment”, by calculation. “Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment” shall be calculated and paid for as described in Section 6-02.3(5)L . For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item “Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment” in the Bid Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. The item “Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment” covers all applicable classes of concrete. “Expansion Joint System Compression Seal - Superstr.”, per linear foot. “Expansion Joint System Strip Seal - Superstr.”, per linear foot. “Expansion Joint Modification - ___”, per linear foot. “___Bearing - Superstr.”, per each. The unit Contract price per each for “___Bearing - Superstr.” shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified in Section 6-02.3(19) , including design, testing, and inspection. “Modular Expansion Joint System___”, lump sum. The lump sum Contract price for “Modular Expansion Joint System___” shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified in Section 6-02.3(13)C . “Prestressed Conc. Girder ___”, per linear foot. “Bridge Approach Slab”, per square yard. The unit Contract price per square yard for “Bridge Approach Slab” shall be full pay for providing, placing, and compacting the crushed surfacing base course, furnishing and placing Class 4000A concrete, and furnishing and installing compression seal, anchors, and reinforcing steel. “Permeon Treatment”, per square yard. The unit contract price per square yard for “Permeon Treatment” shall be full pay for performing the work as specified.

Source: Washington Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, 2024 Edition. Pages 360490 of 1,151.